Update to libtomcrypt 1.18.1, merged with Dropbear changes

4 files changed, 10758 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/libtomcrypt/doc/Doxyfile b/libtomcrypt/doc/Doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b200b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtomcrypt/doc/Doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2430 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.11
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = LibTomCrypt
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER=1.18.1
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
+# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
+# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
+# the logo to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           = libtomsm.png
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = doxygen
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       =
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        = src
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    = ../src/headers
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = NO
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = YES
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
+# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
+# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
+# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# If one adds a struct or class to a group and this option is enabled, then also
+# any nested class or struct is added to the same group. By default this option
+# is disabled and one has to add nested compounds explicitly via \ingroup.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GROUP_NESTED_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = YES
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
+# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = YES
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
+# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
+# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = YES
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
+# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
+# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = NO
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
+# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = NO
+
+# If the WARN_AS_ERROR tag is set to YES then doxygen will immediately stop when
+# a warning is encountered.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_AS_ERROR          = NO
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces. See also FILE_PATTERNS and EXTENSION_MAPPING
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ../src/
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions or not directly supported extensions you also
+# need to set EXTENSION_MAPPING for the extension otherwise the files are not
+# read by doxygen.
+#
+# If left blank the following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp,
+# *.c++, *.java, *.ii, *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h,
+# *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc,
+# *.m, *.markdown, *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.pyw, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl,
+# *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          =
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        =
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions or not directly supported extensions you also
+# need to set EXTENSION_MAPPING for the extension otherwise the files are not
+# properly processed by doxygen.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions or not directly supported extensions you also
+# need to set EXTENSION_MAPPING for the extension otherwise the files are not
+# properly processed by doxygen.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = YES
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = YES
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = YES
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = YES
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# generated with the -Duse-libclang=ON option for CMake.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to YES can help to show when doxygen was last run and thus if the
+# documentation is up to date.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = NO
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
+# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
+# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = YES
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = YES
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. The package can be specified just
+# by its name or with the correct syntax as to be used with the LaTeX
+# \usepackage command. To get the times font for instance you can specify :
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times or EXTRA_PACKAGES={times}
+# To use the option intlimits with the amsmath package you can specify:
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=[intlimits]{amsmath}
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
+# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
+# to HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
+# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
+# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+# If the LATEX_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_TIMESTAMP        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
+# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
+# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
+# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
+# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = NO
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           = ../src/headers
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = LTC_SOURCE \
+                         LTM_DESC \
+                         GMP_DESC \
+                         TFM_DESC
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
+# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = YES
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = NO
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = YES
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = Helvetica
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = YES
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = YES
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = YES
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = YES
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = YES
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command. Disabling a call graph can be
+# accomplished by means of the command \hidecallgraph.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = YES
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command. Disabling a caller graph can be
+# accomplished by means of the command \hidecallergraph.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = YES
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = YES
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = YES
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. For an explanation of the image formats see the section
+# output formats in the documentation of the dot tool (Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/)).
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, png:cairo, png:cairo:cairo, png:cairo:gd, png:gd,
+# png:gd:gd, jpg, jpg:cairo, jpg:cairo:gd, jpg:gd, jpg:gd:gd, gif, gif:cairo,
+# gif:cairo:gd, gif:gd, gif:gd:gd, svg, png:gd, png:gd:gd, png:cairo,
+# png:cairo:gd, png:cairo:cairo, png:cairo:gdiplus, png:gdiplus and
+# png:gdiplus:gdiplus.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
+# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
+
+PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 500
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 5
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = NO
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/libtomcrypt/doc/crypt.tex b/libtomcrypt/doc/crypt.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..feab8e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtomcrypt/doc/crypt.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,8265 @@
+\documentclass[synpaper]{book}
+\usepackage{geometry}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\usepackage{amssymb}
+\usepackage{color}
+\usepackage{alltt}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{layout}
+\usepackage{fancyhdr}
+\usepackage{float}
+\def\union{\cup}
+\def\intersect{\cap}
+\def\getsrandom{\stackrel{\rm R}{\gets}}
+\def\cross{\times}
+\def\cat{\hspace{0.5em} \| \hspace{0.5em}}
+\def\catn{$\|$}
+\def\divides{\hspace{0.3em} | \hspace{0.3em}}
+\def\nequiv{\not\equiv}
+\def\approx{\raisebox{0.2ex}{\mbox{\small $\sim$}}}
+\def\lcm{{\rm lcm}}
+\def\gcd{{\rm gcd}}
+\def\log{{\rm log}}
+\def\ord{{\rm ord}}
+\def\abs{{\mathit abs}}
+\def\rep{{\mathit rep}}
+\def\mod{{\mathit\ mod\ }}
+\renewcommand{\pmod}[1]{\ ({\rm mod\ }{#1})}
+\newcommand{\floor}[1]{\left\lfloor{#1}\right\rfloor}
+\newcommand{\ceil}[1]{\left\lceil{#1}\right\rceil}
+\def\Or{{\rm\ or\ }}
+\def\And{{\rm\ and\ }}
+\def\iff{\hspace{1em}\Longleftrightarrow\hspace{1em}}
+\def\implies{\Rightarrow}
+\def\Proof{\vspace{1ex}\noindent {\bf Proof:}\hspace{1em}}
+\let\oldphi\phi
+\def\phi{\varphi}
+\def\Pr{{\rm Pr}}
+\newcommand{\str}[1]{{\mathbf{#1}}}
+\def\F{{\mathbb F}}
+\def\N{{\mathbb N}}
+\def\Z{{\mathbb Z}}
+\def\R{{\mathbb R}}
+\def\C{{\mathbb C}}
+\def\Q{{\mathbb Q}}
+\definecolor{DGray}{gray}{0.5}
+\newcommand{\emailaddr}[1]{\mbox{$<${#1}$>$}}
+\def\twiddle{\raisebox{0.3ex}{\mbox{\tiny $\sim$}}}
+\def\gap{\vspace{0.5ex}}
+\makeindex
+\newcommand{\mysection}[1]    % Re-define the chaptering command to use
+	{                   % THESE headers.
+	\section{#1}
+   \markboth{\textsf{www.libtom.net}}{\thesection ~ {#1}}
+	}
+
+\newcommand{\mystarsection}[1]    % Re-define the chaptering command to use
+	{                   % THESE headers.
+	\section*{#1}
+   \markboth{\textsf{www.libtom.net}}{{#1}}
+	}
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\begin{document}
+\frontmatter
+\pagestyle{empty}
+
+~
+
+\vspace{2in}
+
+~
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{Huge}LibTomCrypt\end{Huge}
+
+~
+
+\begin{large}Developer Manual\end{large}
+
+~
+
+\vspace{15mm}
+
+
+\begin{tabular}{c}
+LibTom Projects
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\vfil
+\newpage
+This document is part of the LibTomCrypt package and is hereby released into the public domain.
+
+~
+
+Open Source.  Open Academia.  Open Minds.
+
+~
+
+\begin{flushright}
+LibTom Projects
+~
+
+\& originally
+~
+
+Tom St Denis
+~
+
+Ottawa, Ontario
+~
+
+Canada
+~
+\vfil
+\end{flushright}
+\newpage
+
+\tableofcontents
+\listoffigures
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+\mainmatter
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\mysection{What is the LibTomCrypt?}
+LibTomCrypt is a portable ISO C cryptographic library meant to be a tool set for cryptographers who are
+designing cryptosystems.  It supports symmetric ciphers, one-way hashes, pseudo-random number generators,
+public key cryptography (via PKCS \#1 RSA, DH or ECCDH), and a plethora of support routines.
+
+The library was designed such that new ciphers/hashes/PRNGs can be added at run-time and the existing API
+(and helper API functions) are able to use the new designs automatically.  There exists self-check functions for each
+block cipher and hash function to ensure that they compile and execute to the published design specifications.  The library
+also performs extensive parameter error checking to prevent any number of run-time exploits or errors.
+
+\mysection{Why did I write it?}
+You may be wondering, \textit{Tom, why did you write a crypto library.  I already have one.}  Well the reason falls into
+two categories:
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item I am too lazy to figure out someone else's API.  I'd rather invent my own simpler API and use that.
+    \item It was (still is) good coding practice.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+The idea is that I am not striving to replace OpenSSL or Crypto++ or Cryptlib or etc.  I'm trying to write my
+{\bf own} crypto library and hopefully along the way others will appreciate the work.
+
+With this library all core functions (ciphers, hashes, prngs, and bignum) have the same prototype definition.  They all load
+and store data in a format independent of the platform.  This means if you encrypt with Blowfish on a PPC it should decrypt
+on an x86 with zero problems.  The consistent API also means that if you learn how to use Blowfish with the library you
+know how to use Safer+, RC6, or Serpent as well.  With all of the core functions there are central descriptor tables
+that can be used to make a program automatically pick between ciphers, hashes and PRNGs at run-time.  That means your
+application can support all ciphers/hashes/prngs/bignum without changing the source code.
+
+Not only did I strive to make a consistent and simple API to work with but I also attempted to make the library
+configurable in terms of its build options.  Out of the box the library will build with any modern version of GCC
+without having to use configure scripts.  This means that the library will work with platforms where development
+tools may be limited (e.g. no autoconf).
+
+On top of making the build simple and the API approachable I've also attempted for a reasonably high level of
+robustness and efficiency.  LibTomCrypt traps and returns a series of errors ranging from invalid
+arguments to buffer overflows/overruns.  It is mostly thread safe and has been clocked on various platforms
+with \textit{cycles per byte} timings that are comparable (and often favourable) to other libraries such as OpenSSL and
+Crypto++.
+
+\subsection{Modular}
+The LibTomCrypt package has also been written to be very modular.  The block ciphers, one--way hashes,
+pseudo--random number generators (PRNG), and bignum math routines are all used within the API through \textit{descriptor} tables which
+are essentially structures with pointers to functions.  While you can still call particular functions
+directly (\textit{e.g. sha256\_process()}) this descriptor interface allows the developer to customize their
+usage of the library.
+
+For example, consider a hardware platform with a specialized RNG device.  Obviously one would like to tap
+that for the PRNG needs within the library (\textit{e.g. making a RSA key}).  All the developer has to do
+is write a descriptor and the few support routines required for the device.  After that the rest of the
+API can make use of it without change.  Similarly imagine a few years down the road when AES2
+(\textit{or whatever they call it}) has been invented.  It can be added to the library and used within applications
+with zero modifications to the end applications provided they are written properly.
+
+This flexibility within the library means it can be used with any combination of primitive algorithms and
+unlike libraries like OpenSSL is not tied to direct routines.  For instance, in OpenSSL there are CBC block
+mode routines for every single cipher.  That means every time you add or remove a cipher from the library
+you have to update the associated support code as well.  In LibTomCrypt the associated code (\textit{chaining modes in this case})
+are not directly tied to the ciphers.  That is a new cipher can be added to the library by simply providing
+the key setup, ECB decrypt and encrypt and test vector routines.  After that all five chaining mode routines
+can make use of the cipher right away.
+
+\mysection{License}
+
+The project is hereby released as public domain.
+
+\mysection{Patent Disclosure}
+
+The author (Tom St Denis) is not a patent lawyer so this section is not to be treated as legal advice.  To the best
+of the author's knowledge the only patent related issues within the library are the RC5 and RC6 symmetric block ciphers.
+They can be removed from a build by simply commenting out the two appropriate lines in \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h}.  The rest
+of the ciphers and hashes are patent free or under patents that have since expired.
+
+The RC2 and RC4 symmetric ciphers are not under patents but are under trademark regulations.  This means you can use
+the ciphers you just can't advertise that you are doing so.
+
+\mysection{Thanks}
+I would like to give thanks to the following people (in no particular order) for helping me develop this project from
+early on:
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item Richard van de Laarschot
+   \item Richard Heathfield
+   \item Ajay K. Agrawal
+   \item Brian Gladman
+   \item Svante Seleborg
+   \item Clay Culver
+   \item Jason Klapste
+   \item Dobes Vandermeer
+   \item Daniel Richards
+   \item Wayne Scott
+   \item Andrew Tyler
+   \item Sky Schulz
+   \item Christopher Imes
+\end{enumerate}
+
+There have been quite a few other people as well.  Please check the change log to see who else has contributed from
+time to time.
+
+\chapter{The Application Programming Interface (API)}
+\mysection{Introduction}
+\index{CRYPT\_ERROR} \index{CRYPT\_OK}
+
+In general the API is very simple to memorize and use.  Most of the functions return either {\bf void} or {\bf int}.  Functions
+that return {\bf int} will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the function was successful, or one of the many error codes
+if it failed.  Certain functions that return int will return $-1$ to indicate an error.  These functions will be explicitly
+commented upon.  When a function does return a CRYPT error code it can be translated into a string with
+
+\index{error\_to\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+const char *error_to_string(int err);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+An example of handling an error is:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void somefunc(void)
+{
+   int err;
+
+   /* call a cryptographic function */
+   if ((err = some_crypto_function(...)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("A crypto error occurred, %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      /* perform error handling */
+   }
+   /* continue on if no error occurred */
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+There is no initialization routine for the library and for the most part the code is thread safe.  The only thread
+related issue is if you use the same symmetric cipher, hash or public key state data in multiple threads.  Normally
+that is not an issue.
+
+To include the prototypes for \textit{LibTomCrypt.a} into your own program simply include \textit{tomcrypt.h} like so:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void) {
+    return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+The header file \textit{tomcrypt.h} also includes \textit{stdio.h}, \textit{string.h}, \textit{stdlib.h}, \textit{time.h} and \textit{ctype.h}.
+
+\mysection{Macros}
+
+There are a few helper macros to make the coding process a bit easier.  The first set are related to loading and storing
+32/64-bit words in little/big endian format.  The macros are:
+
+\index{STORE32L} \index{STORE64L} \index{LOAD32L} \index{LOAD64L} \index{STORE32H} \index{STORE64H} \index{LOAD32H} \index{LOAD64H} \index{BSWAP}
+\newpage
+\begin{figure}[hpbt]
+\begin{small}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+     \hline STORE32L(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[0 \ldots 3]$ \\
+     \hline STORE64L(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[0 \ldots 7]$ \\
+     \hline LOAD32L(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[0 \ldots 3] \to x$ \\
+     \hline LOAD64L(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[0 \ldots 7] \to x$ \\
+     \hline STORE32H(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[3 \ldots 0]$ \\
+     \hline STORE64H(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $x \to y[7 \ldots 0]$ \\
+     \hline LOAD32H(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[3 \ldots 0] \to x$ \\
+     \hline LOAD64H(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf unsigned char} *y & $y[7 \ldots 0] \to x$ \\
+     \hline BSWAP(x) & {\bf ulong32} x & Swap bytes \\
+     \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Load And Store Macros}
+\end{center}
+\end{small}
+\end{figure}
+
+There are 32 and 64-bit cyclic rotations as well:
+\index{ROL} \index{ROR} \index{ROL64} \index{ROR64} \index{ROLc} \index{RORc} \index{ROL64c} \index{ROR64c}
+\begin{figure}[hpbt]
+\begin{small}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+     \hline ROL(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf ulong32} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\
+     \hline ROLc(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf const ulong32} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\
+     \hline ROR(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf ulong32} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\
+     \hline RORc(x, y) & {\bf ulong32} x, {\bf const ulong32} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 31$ \\
+     \hline && \\
+     \hline ROL64(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf ulong64} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\
+     \hline ROL64c(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf const ulong64} y & $x << y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\
+     \hline ROR64(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf ulong64} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\
+     \hline ROR64c(x, y) & {\bf ulong64} x, {\bf const ulong64} y & $x >> y, 0 \le y \le 63$ \\
+     \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{Rotate Macros}
+\end{center}
+\end{small}
+\end{figure}
+
+\mysection{Functions with Variable Length Output}
+Certain functions such as (for example) \textit{rsa\_export()} give an output that is variable length.  To prevent buffer overflows you
+must pass it the length of the buffer where the output will be stored.  For example:
+\index{rsa\_export()} \index{error\_to\_string()} \index{variable length output}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void) {
+    rsa_key key;
+    unsigned char buffer[1024];
+    unsigned long x;
+    int err;
+
+    /* ... Make up the RSA key somehow ... */
+
+    /* lets export the key, set x to the size of the
+     * output buffer */
+    x = sizeof(buffer);
+    if ((err = rsa_export(buffer, &x, PK_PUBLIC, &key)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+       printf("Export error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+       return -1;
+    }
+
+    /* if rsa_export() was successful then x will have
+     * the size of the output */
+    printf("RSA exported key takes %d bytes\n", x);
+
+    /* ... do something with the buffer */
+
+    return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+In the above example if the size of the RSA public key was more than 1024 bytes this function would return an error code
+indicating a buffer overflow would have occurred.  If the function succeeds, it stores the length of the output back into
+\textit{x} so that the calling application will know how many bytes were used.
+
+As of v1.13, most functions will update your length on failure to indicate the size required by the function.  Not all functions
+support this so please check the source before you rely on it doing that.
+
+\mysection{Functions that need a PRNG}
+\index{Pseudo Random Number Generator} \index{PRNG}
+Certain functions such as \textit{rsa\_make\_key()} require a Pseudo Random Number Generator (PRNG).  These functions do not setup
+the PRNG themselves so it is the responsibility of the calling function to initialize the PRNG before calling them.
+
+Certain PRNG algorithms do not require a \textit{prng\_state} argument (sprng for example).  The \textit{prng\_state} argument
+may be passed as \textbf{NULL} in such situations.
+
+\index{register\_prng()} \index{rsa\_make\_key()}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void) {
+    rsa_key key;
+    int     err;
+
+    /* register the system RNG */
+    register_prng(&sprng_desc)
+
+    /* make a 1024-bit RSA key with the system RNG */
+    if ((err = rsa_make_key(NULL, find_prng("sprng"), 1024/8, 65537, &key))
+        != CRYPT_OK) {
+       printf("make_key error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+       return -1;
+    }
+
+    /* use the key ... */
+
+    return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{Functions that use Arrays of Octets}
+Most functions require inputs that are arrays of the data type \textit{unsigned char}.  Whether it is a symmetric key, IV
+for a chaining mode or public key packet it is assumed that regardless of the actual size of \textit{unsigned char} only the
+lower eight bits contain data.  For example, if you want to pass a 256 bit key to a symmetric ciphers setup routine, you
+must pass in (a pointer to) an array of 32 \textit{unsigned char} variables.  Certain routines (such as SAFER+) take
+special care to work properly on platforms where an \textit{unsigned char} is not eight bits.
+
+For the purposes of this library, the term \textit{byte} will refer to an octet or eight bit word.  Typically an array of
+type \textit{byte} will be synonymous with an array of type \textit{unsigned char.}
+
+\chapter{Symmetric Block Ciphers}
+\mysection{Core Functions}
+LibTomCrypt provides several block ciphers with an ECB block mode interface.  It is important to first note that you
+should never use the ECB modes directly to encrypt data.  Instead you should use the ECB functions to make a chaining mode,
+or use one of the provided chaining modes.  All of the ciphers are written as ECB interfaces since it allows the rest of
+the API to grow in a modular fashion.
+
+\subsection{Key Scheduling}
+All ciphers store their scheduled keys in a single data type called \textit{symmetric\_key}.  This allows all ciphers to
+have the same prototype and store their keys as naturally as possible.  This also removes the need for dynamic memory
+allocation, and allows you to allocate a fixed sized buffer for storing scheduled keys.  All ciphers must provide six visible
+functions which are (given that XXX is the name of the cipher) the following:
+\index{Cipher Setup}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_setup(const unsigned char *key,
+                              int  keylen,
+                              int  rounds,
+                    symmetric_key *skey);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The XXX\_setup() routine will setup the cipher to be used with a given number of rounds and a given key length (in bytes).
+The number of rounds can be set to zero to use the default, which is generally a good idea.
+
+If the function returns successfully the variable \textit{skey} will have a scheduled key stored in it.  It's important to note
+that you should only used this scheduled key with the intended cipher.  For example, if you call \textit{blowfish\_setup()} do not
+pass the scheduled key onto \textit{rc5\_ecb\_encrypt()}.  All built--in setup functions do not allocate memory off the heap so
+when you are done with a key you can simply discard it (e.g. they can be on the stack).  However, to maintain proper coding
+practices you should always call the respective XXX\_done() function.  This allows for quicker porting to applications with
+externally supplied plugins.
+
+\subsection{ECB Encryption and Decryption}
+To encrypt or decrypt a block in ECB mode there are these two functions per cipher:
+\index{Cipher Encrypt} \index{Cipher Decrypt}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_ecb_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt,
+                          unsigned char *ct,
+                          symmetric_key *skey);
+
+int XXX_ecb_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct,
+                          unsigned char *pt,
+                          symmetric_key *skey);
+\end{verbatim}
+These two functions will encrypt or decrypt (respectively) a single block of text\footnote{The size of which depends on
+which cipher you are using.}, storing the result in the \textit{ct} buffer (\textit{pt} resp.).  It is possible that the input and output buffer are
+the same buffer.  For the encrypt function \textit{pt}\footnote{pt stands for plaintext.} is the input and
+\textit{ct}\footnote{ct stands for ciphertext.} is the output.  For the decryption function it's the opposite.  They both
+return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.  To test a particular cipher against test vectors\footnote{As published in their design papers.}
+call the following self-test function.
+
+\subsection{Self--Testing}
+\index{Cipher Testing}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+This function will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the cipher matches the test vectors from the design publication it is
+based upon.
+
+\subsection{Key Sizing}
+For each cipher there is a function which will help find a desired key size.  It is specified as follows:
+\index{Key Sizing}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_keysize(int *keysize);
+\end{verbatim}
+Essentially, it will round the input keysize in \textit{keysize} down to the next appropriate key size.  This function
+will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the key size specified is acceptable.  For example:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int keysize, err;
+
+   /* now given a 20 byte key what keysize does Twofish want to use? */
+   keysize = 20;
+   if ((err = twofish_keysize(&keysize)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error getting key size: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+   printf("Twofish suggested a key size of %d\n", keysize);
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+This should indicate a keysize of sixteen bytes is suggested by storing 16 in \textit{keysize.}
+
+\subsection{Cipher Termination}
+When you are finished with a cipher you can de--initialize it with the done function.
+\begin{verbatim}
+void XXX_done(symmetric_key *skey);
+\end{verbatim}
+For the software based ciphers within LibTomCrypt, these functions will not do anything.  However, user supplied
+cipher descriptors may require to be called for resource management purposes.  To be compliant, all functions which call a cipher
+setup function must also call the respective cipher done function when finished.
+
+\subsection{Simple Encryption Demonstration}
+An example snippet that encodes a block with Blowfish in ECB mode.
+
+\index{blowfish\_setup()} \index{blowfish\_ecb\_encrypt()} \index{blowfish\_ecb\_decrypt()} \index{blowfish\_done()}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   unsigned char pt[8], ct[8], key[8];
+   symmetric_key skey;
+   int err;
+
+   /* ... key is loaded appropriately in key ... */
+   /* ... load a block of plaintext in pt ... */
+
+   /* schedule the key */
+   if ((err = blowfish_setup(key, /* the key we will use */
+                               8, /* key is 8 bytes (64-bits) long */
+                               0, /* 0 == use default # of rounds */
+                           &skey) /* where to put the scheduled key */
+       ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Setup error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* encrypt the block */
+   blowfish_ecb_encrypt(pt,       /* encrypt this 8-byte array */
+                        ct,       /* store encrypted data here */
+                        &skey);   /* our previously scheduled key */
+
+   /* now ct holds the encrypted version of pt */
+
+   /* decrypt the block */
+   blowfish_ecb_decrypt(ct,       /* decrypt this 8-byte array */
+                        pt,       /* store decrypted data here */
+                        &skey);   /* our previously scheduled key */
+
+   /* now we have decrypted ct to the original plaintext in pt */
+
+   /* Terminate the cipher context */
+   blowfish_done(&skey);
+
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{Key Sizes and Number of Rounds}
+\index{Symmetric Keys}
+As a general rule of thumb, do not use symmetric keys under 80 bits if you can help it.  Only a few of the ciphers support smaller
+keys (mainly for test vectors anyways).  Ideally, your application should be making at least 256 bit keys.  This is not
+because you are to be paranoid.  It is because if your PRNG has a bias of any sort the more bits the better.  For
+example, if you have $\mbox{Pr}\left[X = 1\right] = {1 \over 2} \pm \gamma$ where $\vert \gamma \vert > 0$ then the
+total amount of entropy in N bits is $N \cdot -log_2\left ({1 \over 2} + \vert \gamma \vert \right)$.  So if $\gamma$
+were $0.25$ (a severe bias) a 256-bit string would have about 106 bits of entropy whereas a 128-bit string would have
+only 53 bits of entropy.
+
+The number of rounds of most ciphers is not an option you can change.  Only RC5 allows you to change the number of
+rounds.  By passing zero as the number of rounds all ciphers will use their default number of rounds.  Generally the
+ciphers are configured such that the default number of rounds provide adequate security for the given block and key
+size.
+
+\mysection{The Cipher Descriptors}
+\index{Cipher Descriptor}
+To facilitate automatic routines an array of cipher descriptors is provided in the array \textit{cipher\_descriptor}.  An element
+of this array has the following (partial) format (See Section \ref{sec:cipherdesc}):
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+struct _cipher_descriptor {
+   /** name of cipher */
+   char *name;
+
+   /** internal ID */
+   unsigned char ID;
+
+   /** min keysize (octets) */
+   int  min_key_length,
+
+   /** max keysize (octets) */
+        max_key_length,
+
+   /** block size (octets) */
+        block_length,
+
+   /** default number of rounds */
+        default_rounds;
+...<snip>...
+};
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+Where \textit{name} is the lower case ASCII version of the name.  The fields \textit{min\_key\_length} and \textit{max\_key\_length}
+are the minimum and maximum key sizes in bytes.  The \textit{block\_length} member is the block size of the cipher
+in bytes.  As a good rule of thumb it is assumed that the cipher supports
+the min and max key lengths but not always everything in between.  The \textit{default\_rounds} field is the default number
+of rounds that will be used.
+
+For a plugin to be compliant it must provide at least each function listed before the accelerators begin.  Accelerators are optional,
+and if missing will be emulated in software.
+
+The remaining fields are all pointers to the core functions for each cipher.  The end of the cipher\_descriptor array is
+marked when \textit{name} equals {\bf NULL}.
+
+As of this release the current cipher\_descriptors elements are the following:
+\vfil
+\index{Cipher descriptor table}
+\index{blowfish\_desc} \index{xtea\_desc} \index{rc2\_desc} \index{rc5\_desc} \index{rc6\_desc} \index{saferp\_desc} \index{aes\_desc} \index{twofish\_desc}
+\index{des\_desc} \index{des3\_desc} \index{noekeon\_desc} \index{skipjack\_desc} \index{anubis\_desc} \index{khazad\_desc} \index{kseed\_desc} \index{kasumi\_desc} \index{camellia\_desc} \index{aes\_enc\_desc}
+\begin{figure}[hpbt]
+\begin{small}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|c|c|c|}
+     \hline \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Descriptor Name} & \textbf{Block Size} & \textbf{Key Range} & \textbf{Rounds} \\
+     \hline Blowfish & blowfish\_desc & 8 & 8 $\ldots$ 56 & 16 \\
+     \hline X-Tea & xtea\_desc & 8 & 16 & 32 \\
+     \hline RC2 & rc2\_desc & 8 & 5 $\ldots$ 128 & 16 \\
+     \hline RC5-32/12/b & rc5\_desc & 8 & 8 $\ldots$ 128 & 12 $\ldots$ 24 \\
+     \hline RC6-32/20/b & rc6\_desc & 16 & 8 $\ldots$ 128 & 20 \\
+     \hline SAFER+ & saferp\_desc &16 & 16, 24, 32 & 8, 12, 16 \\
+     \hline AES & aes\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 10, 12, 14 \\
+                & aes\_enc\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 10, 12, 14 \\
+     \hline Twofish & twofish\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 16 \\
+     \hline DES & des\_desc & 8 & 8 & 16 \\
+     \hline 3DES (EDE mode) & des3\_desc & 8 & 16, 24 & 16 \\
+     \hline CAST5 (CAST-128) & cast5\_desc & 8 & 5 $\ldots$ 16 & 12, 16 \\
+     \hline Noekeon & noekeon\_desc & 16 & 16 & 16 \\
+     \hline Skipjack & skipjack\_desc & 8 & 10 & 32 \\
+     \hline Anubis & anubis\_desc & 16 & 16 $\ldots$ 40 & 12 $\ldots$ 18 \\
+     \hline Khazad & khazad\_desc & 8 & 16 & 8 \\
+     \hline SEED   & kseed\_desc & 16 & 16 & 16 \\
+     \hline KASUMI & kasumi\_desc & 8 & 16 & 8 \\
+     \hline Camellia & camellia\_desc & 16 & 16, 24, 32 & 18, 24 \\
+     \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{small}
+\caption{Built--In Software Ciphers}
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsection{Notes}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+For AES, (also known as Rijndael) there are four descriptors which complicate issues a little.  The descriptors
+rijndael\_desc and rijndael\_enc\_desc provide the cipher named \textit{rijndael}.  The descriptors aes\_desc and
+aes\_enc\_desc provide the cipher name \textit{aes}.  Functionally both \textit{rijndael} and \textit{aes} are the same cipher.  The
+only difference is when you call find\_cipher() you have to pass the correct name.  The cipher descriptors with \textit{enc}
+in the middle (e.g. rijndael\_enc\_desc) are related to an implementation of Rijndael with only the encryption routine
+and tables.  The decryption and self--test function pointers of both \textit{encrypt only} descriptors are set to \textbf{NULL} and
+should not be called.
+
+The \textit{encrypt only} descriptors are useful for applications that only use the encryption function of the cipher.  Algorithms such
+as EAX, PMAC and OMAC only require the encryption function.  So far this \textit{encrypt only} functionality has only been implemented for
+Rijndael as it makes the most sense for this cipher.
+
+\item
+Note that for \textit{DES} and \textit{3DES} they use 8 and 24 byte keys but only 7 and 21 [respectively] bytes of the keys are in
+fact used for the purposes of encryption.  My suggestion is just to use random 8/24 byte keys instead of trying to make a 8/24
+byte string from the real 7/21 byte key.
+
+For \textit{3DES} exists a two-key mode, that can be initialized by calling the setup function with a \textit{keylen} of 16. This results in the re-usage of key \textit{K1} as key \textit{K3}. This mode has been specified as \textit{Keying Option 2} in FIPS 46-3.
+
+\item
+Note that \textit{Twofish} has additional configuration options (Figure \ref{fig:twofishopts}) that take place at build time.  These options are found in
+the file \textit{tomcrypt\_cfg.h}.  The first option is \textit{TWOFISH\_SMALL} which when defined will force the Twofish code
+to not pre-compute the Twofish \textit{$g(X)$} function as a set of four $8 \times 32$ s-boxes.  This means that a scheduled
+key will require less ram but the resulting cipher will be slower.  The second option is \textit{TWOFISH\_TABLES} which when
+defined will force the Twofish code to use pre-computed tables for the two s-boxes $q_0, q_1$ as well as the multiplication
+by the polynomials 5B and EF used in the MDS multiplication.  As a result the code is faster and slightly larger.  The
+speed increase is useful when \textit{TWOFISH\_SMALL} is defined since the s-boxes and MDS multiply form the heart of the
+Twofish round function.
+
+\begin{figure}[hpbt]
+\index{Twofish build options} \index{TWOFISH\_SMALL} \index{TWOFISH\_TABLES}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
+\hline \textbf{TWOFISH\_SMALL} & \textbf{TWOFISH\_TABLES} & \textbf{Speed and Memory (per key)} \\
+\hline undefined & undefined & Very fast, 4.2KB of ram. \\
+\hline undefined & defined & Faster key setup, larger code. \\
+\hline defined & undefined & Very slow, 0.2KB of ram. \\
+\hline defined & defined & Faster, 0.2KB of ram, larger code. \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\end{small}
+\caption{Twofish Build Options}
+\label{fig:twofishopts}
+\end{figure}
+
+\item
+As of v1.18.0 of the library RC2 got an extended setup function (which didn't fit in the regular API):
+
+\index{rc2\_setup\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rc2_setup_ex(const unsigned char *key,
+                                 int keylen,
+                                 int bits,
+                                 int num_rounds,
+                       symmetric_key *skey);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This setup function also allows to configure the effective key length in bits of the RC2 cipher as in its original specification.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{small}
+
+
+To work with the cipher\_descriptor array there is a function:
+\index{find\_cipher()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int find_cipher(char *name)
+\end{verbatim}
+Which will search for a given name in the array.  It returns $-1$ if the cipher is not found, otherwise it returns
+the location in the array where the cipher was found.  For example, to indirectly setup Blowfish you can also use:
+\begin{small}
+\index{register\_cipher()} \index{find\_cipher()} \index{error\_to\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   unsigned char key[8];
+   symmetric_key skey;
+   int err;
+
+   /* you must register a cipher before you use it */
+   if (register_cipher(&blowfish_desc)) == -1) {
+      printf("Unable to register Blowfish cipher.");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* generic call to function (assuming the key
+    * in key[] was already setup) */
+   if ((err =
+        cipher_descriptor[find_cipher("blowfish")].
+          setup(key, 8, 0, &skey)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error setting up Blowfish: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* ... use cipher ... */
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+A good safety would be to check the return value of \textit{find\_cipher()} before accessing the desired function.  In order
+to use a cipher with the descriptor table you must register it first using:
+\index{register\_cipher()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int register_cipher(const struct _cipher_descriptor *cipher);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which accepts a pointer to a descriptor and returns the index into the global descriptor table.  If an error occurs such
+as there is no more room (it can have 32 ciphers at most) it will return {\bf{-1}}.  If you try to add the same cipher more
+than once it will just return the index of the first copy.  To remove a cipher call:
+\index{unregister\_cipher()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int unregister_cipher(const struct _cipher_descriptor *cipher);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if it removes the cipher, otherwise it returns {\bf CRYPT\_ERROR}.
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int err;
+
+   /* register the cipher */
+   if (register_cipher(&rijndael_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering Rijndael\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* use Rijndael */
+
+   /* remove it */
+   if ((err = unregister_cipher(&rijndael_desc)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error removing Rijndael: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+This snippet is a small program that registers Rijndael.
+
+\mysection{Symmetric Modes of Operations}
+\subsection{Background}
+A typical symmetric block cipher can be used in chaining modes to effectively encrypt messages larger than the block
+size of the cipher.  Given a key $k$, a plaintext $P$ and a cipher $E$ we shall denote the encryption of the block
+$P$ under the key $k$ as $E_k(P)$.  In some modes there exists an initialization vector denoted as $C_{-1}$.
+
+\subsubsection{ECB Mode}
+\index{ECB mode}
+ECB or Electronic Codebook Mode is the simplest method to use.  It is given as:
+\begin{equation}
+C_i = E_k(P_i)
+\end{equation}
+This mode is very weak since it allows people to swap blocks and perform replay attacks if the same key is used more
+than once.
+
+\subsubsection{CBC Mode}
+\index{CBC mode}
+CBC or Cipher Block Chaining mode is a simple mode designed to prevent trivial forms of replay and swap attacks on ciphers.
+It is given as:
+\begin{equation}
+C_i = E_k(P_i \oplus C_{i - 1})
+\end{equation}
+It is important that the initialization vector be unique and preferably random for each message encrypted under the same key.
+
+\subsubsection{CTR Mode}
+\index{CTR mode}
+CTR or Counter Mode is a mode which only uses the encryption function of the cipher.  Given a initialization vector which is
+treated as a large binary counter the CTR mode is given as:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+C_{-1} = C_{-1} + 1\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }2^W) \nonumber \\
+C_i = P_i \oplus E_k(C_{-1})
+\end{eqnarray}
+Where $W$ is the size of a block in bits (e.g. 64 for Blowfish).  As long as the initialization vector is random for each message
+encrypted under the same key replay and swap attacks are infeasible.  CTR mode may look simple but it is as secure
+as the block cipher is under a chosen plaintext attack (provided the initialization vector is unique).
+
+\subsubsection{CFB Mode}
+\index{CFB mode}
+CFB or Ciphertext Feedback Mode is a mode akin to CBC.  It is given as:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+C_i = P_i \oplus C_{-1} \nonumber \\
+C_{-1} = E_k(C_i)
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note that in this library the output feedback width is equal to the size of the block cipher.  That is this mode is used
+to encrypt whole blocks at a time.  However, the library will buffer data allowing the user to encrypt or decrypt partial
+blocks without a delay.  When this mode is first setup it will initially encrypt the initialization vector as required.
+
+\subsubsection{OFB Mode}
+\index{OFB mode}
+OFB or Output Feedback Mode is a mode akin to CBC as well.  It is given as:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+C_{-1} = E_k(C_{-1}) \nonumber \\
+C_i = P_i \oplus C_{-1}
+\end{eqnarray}
+Like the CFB mode the output width in CFB mode is the same as the width of the block cipher.  OFB mode will also
+buffer the output which will allow you to encrypt or decrypt partial blocks without delay.
+
+\subsection{Choice of Mode}
+My personal preference is for the CTR mode since it has several key benefits:
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item No short cycles which is possible in the OFB and CFB modes.
+   \item Provably as secure as the block cipher being used under a chosen plaintext attack.
+   \item Technically does not require the decryption routine of the cipher.
+   \item Allows random access to the plaintext.
+   \item Allows the encryption of block sizes that are not equal to the size of the block cipher.
+\end{enumerate}
+The CTR, CFB and OFB routines provided allow you to encrypt block sizes that differ from the ciphers block size.  They
+accomplish this by buffering the data required to complete a block.  This allows you to encrypt or decrypt any size
+block of memory with either of the three modes.
+
+The ECB and CBC modes process blocks of the same size as the cipher at a time.  Therefore, they are less flexible than the
+other modes.
+
+\subsection{Ciphertext Stealing}
+\index{Ciphertext stealing}
+Ciphertext stealing is a method of dealing with messages in CBC mode which are not a multiple of the block length.  This is accomplished
+by encrypting the last ciphertext block in ECB mode, and XOR'ing the output against the last partial block of plaintext.  LibTomCrypt does not
+support this mode directly but it is fairly easy to emulate with a call to the cipher's ecb\_encrypt() callback function.
+
+The more sane way to deal with partial blocks is to pad them with zeroes, and then use CBC normally.
+
+\subsection{Initialization}
+\index{CBC Mode} \index{CTR Mode}
+\index{OFB Mode} \index{CFB Mode}
+The library provides simple support routines for handling CBC, CTR, CFB, OFB and ECB encoded messages.  Assuming the mode
+you want is XXX there is a structure called \textit{symmetric\_XXX} that will contain the information required to
+use that mode.  They have identical setup routines (except CTR and ECB mode):
+\index{ecb\_start()} \index{cfb\_start()} \index{cbc\_start()} \index{ofb\_start()} \index{ctr\_start()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_start(                int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *IV,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                              int  keylen,
+                              int  num_rounds,
+                    symmetric_XXX *XXX);
+
+int ctr_start(                int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *IV,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                              int  keylen,
+                              int  num_rounds,
+                              int  ctr_mode,
+                    symmetric_CTR *ctr);
+
+int ecb_start(                int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                              int  keylen,
+                              int  num_rounds,
+                    symmetric_ECB *ecb);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In each case, \textit{cipher} is the index into the cipher\_descriptor array of the cipher you want to use.  The \textit{IV} value is
+the initialization vector to be used with the cipher.  You must fill the IV yourself and it is assumed they are the same
+length as the block size\footnote{In other words the size of a block of plaintext for the cipher, e.g. 8 for DES, 16 for AES, etc.}
+of the cipher you choose.  It is important that the IV  be random for each unique message you want to encrypt.  The
+parameters \textit{key}, \textit{keylen} and \textit{num\_rounds} are the same as in the XXX\_setup() function call.  The final parameter
+is a pointer to the structure you want to hold the information for the mode of operation.
+
+The routines return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the cipher initialized correctly, otherwise, they return an error code.
+
+\subsubsection{CTR Mode}
+In the case of CTR mode there is an additional parameter \textit{ctr\_mode} which specifies the mode that the counter is to be used in.
+If \textbf{CTR\_COUNTER\_ LITTLE\_ENDIAN} was specified then the counter will be treated as a little endian value.  Otherwise, if
+\textbf{CTR\_COUNTER\_BIG\_ENDIAN} was specified the counter will be treated as a big endian value.  As of v1.15 the RFC 3686 style of
+increment then encrypt is also supported.  By OR'ing \textbf{LTC\_CTR\_RFC3686} with the CTR \textit{mode} value, ctr\_start() will increment
+the counter before encrypting it for the first time.
+
+As of V1.17, the library supports variable length counters for CTR mode.  The (optional) counter length is specified by OR'ing the octet
+length of the counter against the \textit{ctr\_mode} parameter.  The default, zero, indicates that a full block length counter will be used.  This also
+ensures backwards compatibility with software that uses older versions of the library.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+symmetric_CTR ctr;
+int           err;
+unsigned char IV[16], key[16];
+
+/* use a 32-bit little endian counter */
+if ((err = ctr_start(find_cipher("aes"),
+                     IV, key, 16, 0,
+                     CTR_COUNTER_LITTLE_ENDIAN | 4,
+                     &ctr)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+   handle_error(err);
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+Changing the counter size has little (really no) effect on the performance of the CTR chaining mode.  It is provided for compatibility
+with other software (and hardware) which have smaller fixed sized counters.
+
+\subsection{Encryption and Decryption}
+To actually encrypt or decrypt the following routines are provided:
+\index{ecb\_encrypt()} \index{ecb\_decrypt()} \index{cfb\_encrypt()} \index{cfb\_decrypt()}
+\index{cbc\_encrypt()} \index{cbc\_decrypt()} \index{ofb\_encrypt()} \index{ofb\_decrypt()} \index{ctr\_encrypt()} \index{ctr\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned long  len,
+                      symmetric_YYY *YYY);
+
+int XXX_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned long  len,
+                      symmetric_YYY *YYY);
+\end{verbatim}
+Where \textit{XXX} is one of $\lbrace ecb, cbc, ctr, cfb, ofb \rbrace$.
+
+In all cases, \textit{len} is the size of the buffer (as number of octets) to encrypt or decrypt.  The CTR, OFB and CFB modes are order sensitive but not
+chunk sensitive.  That is you can encrypt \textit{ABCDEF} in three calls like \textit{AB}, \textit{CD}, \textit{EF} or two like \textit{ABCDE} and \textit{F}
+and end up with the same ciphertext.  However, encrypting \textit{ABC} and \textit{DABC} will result in different ciphertexts.  All
+five of the modes will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} on success from the encrypt or decrypt functions.
+
+In the ECB and CBC cases, \textit{len} must be a multiple of the ciphers block size.  In the CBC case, you must manually pad the end of your message (either with
+zeroes or with whatever your protocol requires).
+
+To decrypt in either mode, perform the setup like before (recall you have to fetch the IV value you used), and use the decrypt routine on all of the blocks.
+
+\subsection{IV Manipulation}
+To change or read the IV of a previously initialized chaining mode use the following two functions.
+\index{cbc\_setiv()} \index{cbc\_getiv()} \index{ofb\_setiv()} \index{ofb\_getiv()} \index{cfb\_setiv()} \index{cfb\_getiv()}
+\index{ctr\_setiv()} \index{ctr\_getiv()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_getiv(unsigned char *IV,
+              unsigned long *len,
+              symmetric_XXX *XXX);
+
+int XXX_setiv(const unsigned char *IV,
+                    unsigned long  len,
+                    symmetric_XXX *XXX);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The XXX\_getiv() functions will read the IV out of the chaining mode and store it into \textit{IV} along with the length of the IV
+stored in \textit{len}.  The XXX\_setiv will initialize the chaining mode state as if the original IV were the new IV specified.  The length
+of the IV passed in must be the size of the ciphers block size.
+
+The XXX\_setiv() functions are handy if you wish to change the IV without re--keying the cipher.
+
+What the \textit{setiv} function will do depends on the mode being changed.  In CBC mode, the new IV replaces the existing IV as if it
+were the last ciphertext block.  In CFB mode, the IV is encrypted as if it were the prior encrypted pad.  In CTR mode, the IV is encrypted without
+first incrementing it (regardless of the LTC\_RFC\_3686 flag presence).  In F8 mode, the IV is encrypted and becomes the new pad.  It does not change
+the salted IV, and is only meant to allow seeking within a session.  In LRW, it changes the tweak, forcing a computation of the tweak pad, allowing for
+seeking within the session.  In OFB mode, the IV is encrypted and becomes the new pad.
+
+\subsection{Stream Termination}
+To terminate an open stream call the done function.
+
+\index{ecb\_done()} \index{cbc\_done()}\index{cfb\_done()}\index{ofb\_done()} \index{ctr\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_done(symmetric_XXX *XXX);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will terminate the stream (by terminating the cipher) and return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if successful.
+
+\newpage
+\subsection{Examples}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   unsigned char key[16], IV[16], buffer[512];
+   symmetric_CTR ctr;
+   int x, err;
+
+   /* register twofish first */
+   if (register_cipher(&twofish_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering cipher.\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* somehow fill out key and IV */
+
+   /* start up CTR mode */
+   if ((err = ctr_start(
+        find_cipher("twofish"), /* index of desired cipher */
+                            IV, /* the initialization vector */
+                           key, /* the secret key */
+                            16, /* length of secret key (16 bytes) */
+                             0, /* 0 == default # of rounds */
+     CTR_COUNTER_LITTLE_ENDIAN, /* Little endian counter */
+                         &ctr)  /* where to store the CTR state */
+      ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("ctr_start error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* somehow fill buffer than encrypt it */
+   if ((err = ctr_encrypt(        buffer, /* plaintext */
+                                  buffer, /* ciphertext */
+                          sizeof(buffer), /* length of plaintext pt */
+                                   &ctr)  /* CTR state */
+      ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("ctr_encrypt error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* make use of ciphertext... */
+
+   /* now we want to decrypt so let's use ctr_setiv */
+   if ((err = ctr_setiv(  IV, /* the initial IV we gave to ctr_start */
+                          16, /* the IV is 16 bytes long */
+                        &ctr) /* the ctr state we wish to modify */
+       ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("ctr_setiv error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   if ((err = ctr_decrypt(        buffer, /* ciphertext */
+                                  buffer, /* plaintext */
+                          sizeof(buffer), /* length of plaintext */
+                                   &ctr)  /* CTR state */
+      ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("ctr_decrypt error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* terminate the stream */
+   if ((err = ctr_done(&ctr)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("ctr_done error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* clear up and return */
+   zeromem(key, sizeof(key));
+   zeromem(&ctr, sizeof(ctr));
+
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\subsection{LRW Mode}
+LRW mode is a cipher mode which is meant for indexed encryption like used to handle storage media.  It is meant to have efficient seeking and overcome the
+security problems of ECB mode while not increasing the storage requirements.  It is used much like any other chaining mode except with two key differences.
+
+The key is specified as two strings the first key $K_1$ is the (normally AES) key and can be any length (typically 16, 24 or 32 octets long).  The second key
+$K_2$ is the \textit{tweak} key and is always 16 octets long.  The tweak value is \textbf{NOT} a nonce or IV value it must be random and secret.
+
+To initialize LRW mode use:
+
+\index{lrw\_start()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int lrw_start(                int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *IV,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                              int  keylen,
+              const unsigned char *tweak,
+                              int  num_rounds,
+                    symmetric_LRW *lrw);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the LRW context with the given (16 octet) \textit{IV}, cipher $K_1$ \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets and the (16 octet) $K_2$ \textit{tweak}.
+While LRW was specified to be used only with AES, LibTomCrypt will allow any 128--bit block cipher to be specified as indexed by \textit{cipher}.  The
+number of rounds for the block cipher \textit{num\_rounds} can be 0 to use the default number of rounds for the given cipher.
+
+To process data use the following functions:
+
+\index{lrw\_encrypt()} \index{lrw\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int lrw_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned long  len,
+                      symmetric_LRW *lrw);
+
+int lrw_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned long  len,
+                      symmetric_LRW *lrw);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encrypt (or decrypt) the plaintext to the ciphertext buffer (or vice versa).  The length is specified by \textit{len} in octets but must be a multiple
+of 16.  The LRW code uses a fast tweak update such that consecutive blocks are encrypted faster than if random seeking where used.
+
+To manipulate the IV use the following functions:
+
+\index{lrw\_getiv()} \index{lrw\_setiv()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int lrw_getiv(unsigned char *IV,
+              unsigned long *len,
+              symmetric_LRW *lrw);
+
+int lrw_setiv(const unsigned char *IV,
+                    unsigned long  len,
+                    symmetric_LRW *lrw);
+\end{verbatim}
+These will get or set the 16--octet IV.  Note that setting the IV is the same as \textit{seeking} and unlike other modes is not a free operation.  It requires
+updating the entire tweak which is slower than sequential use.  Avoid seeking excessively in performance constrained code.
+
+To terminate the LRW state use the following:
+
+\index{lrw\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int lrw_done(symmetric_LRW *lrw);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{XTS Mode}
+As of v1.17, LibTomCrypt supports XTS mode with code donated by Elliptic Semiconductor Inc.\footnote{www.ellipticsemi.com}.
+XTS is a chaining mode for 128--bit block ciphers, recommended by IEEE (P1619)
+for disk encryption.  It is meant to be an encryption mode with random access to the message data without compromising privacy.  It requires two private keys (of equal
+length) to perform the encryption process.  Each encryption invocation includes a sector number or unique identifier specified as a 128--bit string.
+
+To initialize XTS mode use the following function call:
+
+\index{xts\_start()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xts_start(                int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *key1,
+              const unsigned char *key2,
+                    unsigned long  keylen,
+                              int  num_rounds,
+                    symmetric_xts *xts)
+\end{verbatim}
+This will start the XTS mode with the two keys pointed to by \textit{key1} and \textit{key2} of length \textit{keylen} octets each.
+
+To encrypt or decrypt a sector use the following calls:
+
+\index{xts\_encrypt()} \index{xts\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xts_encrypt(
+   const unsigned char *pt, unsigned long ptlen,
+         unsigned char *ct,
+   const unsigned char *tweak,
+         symmetric_xts *xts);
+
+int xts_decrypt(
+   const unsigned char *ct, unsigned long ptlen,
+         unsigned char *pt,
+   const unsigned char *tweak,
+         symmetric_xts *xts);
+\end{verbatim}
+The first will encrypt the plaintext pointed to by \textit{pt} of length \textit{ptlen} octets, and store the ciphertext in the array pointed to by
+\textit{ct}.  It uses the 128--bit tweak pointed to by \textit{tweak} to encrypt the block.  The decrypt function performs the opposite operation.  Both
+functions support ciphertext stealing (blocks that are not multiples of 16 bytes).
+
+The P1619 specification states the tweak for sector number shall be represented as a 128--bit little endian string.
+
+To terminate the XTS state call the following function:
+
+\index{xts\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void xts_done(symmetric_xts *xts);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{F8 Mode}
+\index{F8 Mode}
+The F8 Chaining mode (see RFC 3711 for instance) is yet another chaining mode for block ciphers.  It behaves much like CTR mode in that it XORs a keystream
+against the plaintext to encrypt.  F8 mode comes with the additional twist that the counter value is secret, encrypted by a \textit{salt key}.  We
+initialize F8 mode with the following function call:
+
+\index{f8\_start()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f8_start(                int  cipher,
+             const unsigned char *IV,
+             const unsigned char *key,
+                             int  keylen,
+             const unsigned char *salt_key,
+                             int  skeylen,
+                             int  num_rounds,
+                    symmetric_F8 *f8);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will start the F8 mode state using \textit{key} as the secret key, \textit{IV} as the counter.  It uses the \textit{salt\_key} as IV encryption key
+(\textit{m} in the RFC 3711).  The salt\_key can be shorter than the secret key but it should not be longer.
+
+To encrypt or decrypt data we use the following two functions:
+
+\index{f8\_encrypt()} \index{f8\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f8_encrypt(const unsigned char *pt,
+                     unsigned char *ct,
+                     unsigned long  len,
+                      symmetric_F8 *f8);
+
+int f8_decrypt(const unsigned char *ct,
+                     unsigned char *pt,
+                     unsigned long  len,
+                      symmetric_F8 *f8);
+\end{verbatim}
+These will encrypt or decrypt a variable length array of bytes using the F8 mode state specified.  The length is specified in bytes and does not have to be a multiple
+of the ciphers block size.
+
+To change or retrieve the current counter IV value use the following functions:
+\index{f8\_getiv()} \index{f8\_setiv()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f8_getiv(unsigned char *IV,
+             unsigned long *len,
+              symmetric_F8 *f8);
+
+int f8_setiv(const unsigned char *IV,
+                   unsigned long  len,
+                    symmetric_F8 *f8);
+\end{verbatim}
+These work with the current IV value only and not the encrypted IV value specified during the call to f8\_start().  The purpose of these two functions is to be
+able to seek within a current session only.  If you want to change the session IV you will have to call f8\_done() and then start a new state with
+f8\_start().
+
+To terminate an F8 state call the following function:
+
+\index{f8\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f8_done(symmetric_F8 *f8);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\chapter{Stream Ciphers}
+
+Stream ciphers are symmetric key ciphers which operate on a stream of bytes (in theory on a stream of bits
+however LibTomCrypt's implementation works with bytes).
+
+The API for all stream ciphers operates in mode: \textit{setup} -- \textit{crypt} -- \textit{crypt} -- ... -- \textit{done}.
+Please note that both encryption and decryption are implemented via \textit{crypt}.
+
+Another useful feature of the stream ciphers API is generation of a random stream of bytes which works like:
+\textit{setup} -- \textit{keystream} -- \textit{keystream} -- ... -- \textit{done}. The random stream generation is
+implemented like encryption of a stream of \textit{0x00} bytes.
+
+Note: You shouldn't use the keystream interface as a PRNG, as it doesn't allow to re-seed the internal state.
+
+\mysection{ChaCha}
+
+\textit{ChaCha} is currently the most modern stream cipher included in LibTomCrypt, so use this one unless you
+have a reason for using some of the older algorithms.
+
+For more information about ChaCha see \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ChaCha_(cipher)}.
+
+Supported key size: 16 or 32 bytes (128 or 256 bits).
+
+You can initialize ChaCha with 96bit \textit{nonce} + 32bit \textit{counter}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+chacha_state st;
+err = chacha_setup(&st, key, key_len, rounds);
+err = chacha_ivctr32(&st, nonce, 12, initial_32bit_ctr);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Or with 64bit \textit{nonce} + 64bit \textit{counter}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+chacha_state st;
+err = chacha_setup(&st, key, key_len, rounds);
+err = chacha_ivctr64(&st, nonce, 8, initial_64bit_ctr);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \textit{chacha\_setup} takes the number of rounds as a parameter -- choose 20 if you are not sure.
+As always never ever use the same key + nonce pair more than once.
+
+For the actual encryption or decryption you have to call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = chacha_crypt(&st, in_buffer, in_len, out_buffer);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you just want a random stream of bytes initialize the cipher with a truly random \textit{key} (32 bytes),
+a truly random \textit{nonce} (8 bytes) and zero initial counter. After that you can get a stream of pseudo--random
+bytes via:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = chacha_keystream(&st, out_buffer, out_len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+At the end you have to terminate the state:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = chacha_done(&st);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{RC4}
+
+For more information about RC4 see \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/RC4}.
+
+Supported key size: 5--256 bytes
+
+You need to initialize RC4 only with a \textit{key}.
+\begin{verbatim}
+rc4_state st;
+err = rc4_stream_setup(&st, key, key_len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For the actual encryption or decryption you have to call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = rc4_stream_crypt(&st, in_buffer, in_len, out_buffer);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+If you just want a random stream of bytes initialize the cipher with truly random \textit{key}.
+After that you can get a stream of pseudo--random bytes via:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = rc4_stream_keystream(&st, out_buffer, out_len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+At the end you have to terminate the state:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = rc4_stream_done(&st);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{Sober128}
+
+Supported key size: must be multiple of 4 bytes
+
+You need to initialize Sober128 with a \textit{key} and a \textit{nonce} (must be multiple of 4 bytes).
+\begin{verbatim}
+sober128_state st;
+err = sober128_stream_setup(&st, key, 16);
+err = sober128_stream_setiv(&st, nonce, 12);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+For the actual encryption or decryption you to call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = sober128_stream_crypt(&st, in_buffer, in_len, out_buffer);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If you just want a random stream of bytes initialize the cipher with a truly random \textit{key}
+and a truly random \textit{nonce}. After that you can get a stream of pseudo--random bytes via:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = sober128_stream_keystream(&st, out_buffer, out_len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+At the end you have to terminate the state:
+\begin{verbatim}
+err = sober128_stream_done(&st);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\chapter{Authenticated Encryption}
+
+Authenticated Encryption - sometimes also called Authenticated Encryption with Associated Data (AEAD) - is a variant of encryption
+that provides not only confidentiality (as other symmetric or stream ciphers) but also integrity.
+
+The inputs of Authenticated Encryption are: \textit{key}, \textit{nonce} (sometimes called initialization vector), \textit{plaintext},
+optional \textit{header} (sometimes called additional authenticated data - AAD). The outputs are: \textit{ciphertext} and \textit{tag}.
+
+\mysection{EAX Mode}
+LibTomCrypt provides support for a mode called EAX\footnote{See
+M. Bellare, P. Rogaway, D. Wagner, A Conventional Authenticated-Encryption Mode.} in a manner similar to the way it was intended to be used
+by the designers.  First, a short description of what EAX mode is before we explain how to use it.  EAX is a mode that requires a cipher,
+CTR and OMAC support and provides encryption and
+authentication\footnote{Note that since EAX only requires OMAC and CTR you may use \textit{encrypt only} cipher descriptors with this mode.}.
+It is initialized with a random \textit{nonce} that can be shared publicly, a \textit{header} which can be fixed and public, and a random secret symmetric key.
+
+The \textit{header} data is meant to be meta--data associated with a stream that isn't private (e.g., protocol messages).  It can
+be added at anytime during an EAX stream, and is part of the authentication tag.  That is, changes in the meta-data can be detected by changes in the output tag.
+
+The mode can then process plaintext producing ciphertext as well as compute a partial checksum.  The actual checksum
+called a \textit{tag} is only emitted when the message is finished.  In the interim, the user can process any arbitrary
+sized message block to send to the recipient as ciphertext.  This makes the EAX mode especially suited for streaming modes
+of operation.
+
+The mode is initialized with the following function.
+\index{eax\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int eax_init(          eax_state *eax,
+                             int  cipher,
+             const unsigned char *key,
+                   unsigned long  keylen,
+             const unsigned char *nonce,
+                   unsigned long  noncelen,
+             const unsigned char *header,
+                   unsigned long  headerlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Where \textit{eax} is the EAX state.  The \textit{cipher} parameter is the index of the desired cipher in the descriptor table.
+The \textit{key} parameter is the shared secret symmetric key of length \textit{keylen} octets.  The \textit{nonce} parameter is the
+random public string of length \textit{noncelen} octets.  The \textit{header} parameter is the random (or fixed or \textbf{NULL}) header for the
+message of length \textit{headerlen} octets.
+
+When this function completes, the \textit{eax} state will be initialized such that you can now either have data decrypted or
+encrypted in EAX mode.  Note: if \textit{headerlen} is zero you may pass \textit{header} as \textbf{NULL} to indicate there is no initial header data.
+
+To encrypt or decrypt data in a streaming mode use the following.
+\index{eax\_encrypt()} \index{eax\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int eax_encrypt(          eax_state *eax,
+                const unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned long  length);
+
+int eax_decrypt(          eax_state *eax,
+                const unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned long  length);
+\end{verbatim}
+The function \textit{eax\_encrypt} will encrypt the bytes in \textit{pt} of \textit{length} octets, and store the ciphertext in
+\textit{ct}.  Note: \textit{ct} and \textit{pt} may be the same region in memory.   This function will also send the ciphertext
+through the OMAC function.  The function \textit{eax\_decrypt} decrypts \textit{ct}, and stores it in \textit{pt}.  This also allows
+\textit{pt} and \textit{ct} to be the same region in memory.
+
+You cannot both encrypt or decrypt with the same \textit{eax} context.  For bi--directional communication you will need to initialize
+two EAX contexts (preferably with different headers and nonces).
+
+Note: both of these functions allow you to send the data in any granularity but the order is important.  While
+the eax\_init() function allows you to add initial header data to the stream you can also add header data during the
+EAX stream with the following.
+
+\index{eax\_addheader()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int eax_addheader(          eax_state *eax,
+                  const unsigned char *header,
+                        unsigned long  length);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will add the \textit{length} octet from \textit{header} to the given \textit{eax} header.  Once the message is finished, the
+\textit{tag} (checksum) may be computed with the following function:
+
+\index{eax\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int eax_done(    eax_state *eax,
+             unsigned char *tag,
+             unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will terminate the EAX state \textit{eax}, and store up to \textit{taglen} bytes of the message tag in \textit{tag}.  The function
+then stores how many bytes of the tag were written out back in to \textit{taglen}.
+
+The EAX mode code can be tested to ensure it matches the test vectors by calling the following function:
+\index{eax\_test()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int eax_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+This requires that the AES (or Rijndael) block cipher be registered with the cipher\_descriptor table first.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int           err;
+   eax_state     eax;
+   unsigned char pt[64], ct[64], nonce[16], key[16], tag[16];
+   unsigned long taglen;
+
+   if (register_cipher(&rijndael_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering Rijndael");
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* ... make up random nonce and key ... */
+
+   /* initialize context */
+   if ((err = eax_init(            &eax,  /* context */
+                find_cipher("rijndael"),  /* cipher id */
+                                  nonce,  /* the nonce */
+                                     16,  /* nonce is 16 bytes */
+                              "TestApp",  /* example header */
+                                      7)  /* header length */
+       ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error eax_init: %s", error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* now encrypt data, say in a loop or whatever */
+   if ((err = eax_encrypt(     &eax, /* eax context */
+                                 pt, /* plaintext  (source) */
+                                 ct, /* ciphertext (destination) */
+                          sizeof(pt) /* size of plaintext */
+      ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error eax_encrypt: %s", error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* finish message and get authentication tag */
+   taglen = sizeof(tag);
+   if ((err = eax_done(   &eax,      /* eax context */
+                           tag,      /* where to put tag */
+                       &taglen       /* length of tag space */
+      ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error eax_done: %s", error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* now we have the authentication tag in "tag" and
+    * it's taglen bytes long */
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You can also perform an entire EAX state on a block of memory in a single function call with the
+following functions.
+
+
+\index{eax\_encrypt\_authenticate\_memory} \index{eax\_decrypt\_verify\_memory}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int eax_encrypt_authenticate_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+    const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen,
+    const unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+          unsigned char *ct,
+          unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long *taglen);
+
+int eax_decrypt_verify_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+    const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen,
+    const unsigned char *ct,     unsigned long ctlen,
+          unsigned char *pt,
+          unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long taglen,
+          int           *res);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Both essentially just call eax\_init() followed by eax\_encrypt() (or eax\_decrypt() respectively) and eax\_done().  The parameters
+have the same meaning as with those respective functions.
+
+The only difference is eax\_decrypt\_verify\_memory() does not emit a tag.  Instead you pass it a tag as input and it compares it against
+the tag it computed while decrypting the message.  If the tags match then it stores a $1$ in \textit{res}, otherwise it stores a $0$.
+
+\mysection{OCB Modes}
+\subsection{Preface}
+
+LibTomCrypt provides support for a mode called OCB in version 1 ''OCB''\footnote{See
+P. Rogaway, M. Bellare, J. Black, T. Krovetz, \textit{OCB: A Block Cipher Mode of Operation for Efficient Authenticated Encryption}.}
+and version 3 ''OCB3''\footnote{See RFC7253, T. Krovetz, P. Rogaway, \textit{The OCB Authenticated-Encryption Algorithm}.}.
+OCB is an encryption protocol that simultaneously provides authentication.  It is slightly faster to use than EAX mode
+but is less flexible.
+
+Please be aware that all versions of OCB are patented and there are several licensing models provided by P. Rogaway, the patent holder
+-- see \url{http://web.cs.ucdavis.edu/~rogaway/ocb/license.htm}.
+
+\subsection{OCB}
+\subsubsection{Initialization and processing}
+
+Let's review how to initialize an OCB context.
+
+\index{ocb\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb_init(          ocb_state *ocb,
+                             int  cipher,
+             const unsigned char *key,
+                   unsigned long  keylen,
+             const unsigned char *nonce);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the \textit{ocb} context using cipher descriptor \textit{cipher}.  It will use a \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen}
+and the random \textit{nonce}.  Note that \textit{nonce} must be a random (public) string the same length as the block ciphers
+block size (e.g. 16 bytes for AES).
+
+This mode has no \textit{Associated Data} like EAX mode does which means you cannot authenticate metadata along with the stream.
+To encrypt or decrypt data use the following.
+
+\index{ocb\_encrypt()} \index{ocb\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb_encrypt(          ocb_state *ocb,
+                const unsigned char *pt,
+                      unsigned char *ct);
+
+int ocb_decrypt(          ocb_state *ocb,
+                const unsigned char *ct,
+                      unsigned char *pt);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will encrypt (or decrypt for the latter) a fixed length of data from \textit{pt} to \textit{ct} (vice versa for the latter).
+They assume that \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} are the same size as the block cipher's block size.  Note that you cannot call
+both functions given a single \textit{ocb} state.  For bi-directional communication you will have to initialize two \textit{ocb}
+states (with different nonces).  Also \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} may point to the same location in memory.
+
+\subsubsection{State Termination}
+
+When you are finished encrypting the message you call the following function to compute the tag.
+
+\index{ocb\_done\_encrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb_done_encrypt(          ocb_state *ocb,
+                     const unsigned char *pt,
+                           unsigned long  ptlen,
+                           unsigned char *ct,
+                           unsigned char *tag,
+                           unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will terminate an encrypt stream \textit{ocb}.  If you have trailing bytes of plaintext that will not complete a block
+you can pass them here.  This will also encrypt the \textit{ptlen} bytes in \textit{pt} and store them in \textit{ct}.  It will also
+store up to \textit{taglen} bytes of the tag into \textit{tag}.
+
+Note that \textit{ptlen} must be less than or equal to the block size of block cipher chosen.  Also note that if you have
+an input message equal to the length of the block size then you pass the data here (not to ocb\_encrypt()) only.
+
+To terminate a decrypt stream and compared the tag you call the following.
+
+\index{ocb\_done\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb_done_decrypt(          ocb_state *ocb,
+                     const unsigned char *ct,
+                           unsigned long  ctlen,
+                           unsigned char *pt,
+                     const unsigned char *tag,
+                           unsigned long  taglen,
+                                     int *res);
+\end{verbatim}
+Similarly to the previous function you can pass trailing message bytes into this function.  This will compute the
+tag of the message (internally) and then compare it against the \textit{taglen} bytes of \textit{tag} provided.  By default
+\textit{res} is set to zero.  If all \textit{taglen} bytes of \textit{tag} can be verified then \textit{res} is set to one (authenticated
+message).
+
+\subsubsection{Packet Functions}
+To make life simpler the following two functions are provided for memory bound OCB.
+
+%\index{ocb\_encrypt\_authenticate\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb_encrypt_authenticate_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,
+    const unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+          unsigned char *ct,
+          unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will OCB encrypt the message \textit{pt} of length \textit{ptlen}, and store the ciphertext in \textit{ct}.  The length \textit{ptlen}
+can be any arbitrary length.
+
+\index{ocb\_decrypt\_verify\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb_decrypt_verify_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,
+    const unsigned char *ct,     unsigned long ctlen,
+          unsigned char *pt,
+    const unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long taglen,
+          int           *res);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Similarly, this will OCB decrypt, and compare the internally computed tag against the tag provided. \textit{res} is set
+appropriately to \textit{1} if the tag matches or to \textit{0} if it doesn't match.
+
+\subsection{OCB3}
+\subsubsection{Initialization and processing}
+
+\index{ocb3\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_init(ocb3_state *ocb, int cipher,
+             const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen,
+             const unsigned char *nonce, unsigned long noncelen,
+             unsigned long taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the \textit{ocb} context using cipher descriptor \textit{cipher}.  It will use a \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen}
+and the random \textit{nonce} of length \textit{noncelen}.  The \textit{nonce} must be a random (public) string of an arbitrary length
+between 1 and 15 octets.  The desired length of the TAG that should be created when terminating the state has to be passed in \textit{taglen}
+and has to be between 0 and 16 octets.
+
+Note that you can only use ciphers with a block length of 16.
+
+\subsubsection{Additional Authenticated Data}
+
+OCB3 has, in contrary to OCB, the possibility to add "Additional Authenticated Data" (AAD) when performing cryptographic operations.
+
+\index{ocb3\_add\_aad()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_add_aad(ocb3_state *ocb, const unsigned char *aad, unsigned long aadlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will add the AAD at \textit{aad} of the arbitrary length \textit{aadlen} to be authenticated within the context \textit{ocb}.
+
+\index{ocb3\_encrypt()} \index{ocb3\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_encrypt(         ocb3_state *ocb,
+                 const unsigned char *pt,
+                       unsigned long ptlen,
+                       unsigned char *ct);
+
+int ocb3_decrypt(         ocb3_state *ocb,
+                 const unsigned char *ct,
+                       unsigned long ctlen,
+                       unsigned char *pt);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will encrypt (or decrypt for the latter) a fixed length of data from \textit{pt} to \textit{ct} (vice versa for the latter).
+They assume that \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} are the same size as the block cipher's block size.  Note that you cannot call
+both functions given a single \textit{ocb} state.  For bi-directional communication you will have to initialize two \textit{ocb}
+states (with different nonces).  Also \textit{pt} and \textit{ct} may point to the same location in memory.
+
+\subsubsection{State Termination}
+
+\index{ocb3\_encrypt\_last()} \index{ocb3\_decrypt\_last()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_encrypt_last(         ocb3_state *ocb,
+                      const unsigned char *pt,
+                            unsigned long ptlen,
+                            unsigned char *ct);
+
+int ocb3_decrypt_last(         ocb3_state *ocb,
+                      const unsigned char *ct,
+                            unsigned long ctlen,
+                            unsigned char *pt);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This has to be called for the last encrypt (or decrypt) operation. Note that if you have to invoke only a single operation you can
+directly use these functions instead of \textit{ocb3\_encrypt()} or \textit{ocb3\_decrypt()}.
+
+When you are finished encrypting the message you call the following function to compute the tag.
+
+\index{ocb3\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_done(ocb3_state *ocb, unsigned char *tag, unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This stores the tag of the \textit{ocb} state in \textit{tag}.
+The \textit{taglen} parameter defines on input the length of the tag to output and will be set to the actual length written, which
+is at most 16 octets.
+
+\subsubsection{Packet Functions}
+To make life simpler the following two functions are provided for memory bound OCB3.
+
+\index{ocb3\_encrypt\_authenticate\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_encrypt_authenticate_memory(int cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+    const unsigned char *adata,  unsigned long adatalen,
+    const unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+          unsigned char *ct,
+          unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will OCB3 encrypt the message \textit{pt} of length \textit{ptlen}, and store the ciphertext in \textit{ct}.  The length \textit{ptlen}
+can be any arbitrary length.  The additional authenticated data \textit{adata} of length \textit{adatalen} is optional and can be left out
+by passing \textit{NULL} as \textit{adata}. The length of the authentication TAG will be stored in \textit{tag}, which is also optional.
+The length of the TAG passed in \textit{taglen} has to be between 0 and 16.
+
+\index{ocb3\_decrypt\_verify\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ocb3_decrypt_verify_memory(int cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+    const unsigned char *adata,  unsigned long adatalen,
+    const unsigned char *ct,     unsigned long ctlen,
+          unsigned char *pt,
+    const unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long taglen,
+          int           *stat);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Similarly, this will OCB3 decrypt, and compare the internally computed tag against the tag provided. \textit{res} is set
+appropriately to \textit{1} if the tag matches or to \textit{0} if it doesn't match.
+
+\mysection{CCM Mode}
+CCM is a NIST proposal for encrypt + authenticate that is centered around using AES (or any 16--byte cipher) as a primitive.
+
+\subsection{Initialization}
+To initialize the CCM context with a secret key call the following function.
+
+\index{ccm\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_init(      ccm_state *ccm,
+                   int cipher,
+             const unsigned char *key,
+                   int keylen,
+                   int ptlen,
+                   int taglen,
+                   int aadlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This initializes the CCM state \textit{ccm} for the given cipher indexed by \textit{cipher}, with a secret key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets. The cipher
+chosen must have a 16--byte block size (e.g., AES).
+Unlike EAX and OCB mode, CCM is only meant for \textit{packet} mode where the length of the input is known in advance. This is why the length of the stream
+to authenticate is given as \textit{ptlen}.
+With CCM, a header is meta--data you want to send with the message but not have encrypted. The header len is given in the init
+as \textit{aadlen}.
+
+\subsection{Nonce Vector}
+After the state has been initialized (or reset) the next step is to add the session (or packet) initialization vector.  It should be unique per packet encrypted.
+
+\index{ccm\_add\_nonce()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_add_nonce(      ccm_state *ccm,
+                  const unsigned char *nonce,
+                        unsigned long noncelen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This adds the nonce (a.k.a. salt) \textit{nonce} of length \textit{noncelen} octets to the CCM state \textit{ccm}. Note that this function must be called
+once and only once.
+
+\subsection{Additional Authentication Data}
+The header is meta--data you want to send with the message but not have encrypted, it must be stored in \textit{adata} of length \textit{adatalen} octets.
+
+\index{ccm\_add\_aad()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_add_aad(      ccm_state *ccm,
+                const unsigned char *adata,
+                      unsigned long adatalen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This adds the additional authentication data \textit{adata} of length \textit{adatalen} to the CCM state \textit{ccm}.
+
+\subsection{Plaintext Processing}
+After the AAD has been processed, the plaintext (or ciphertext depending on the direction) can be processed.
+
+\index{ccm\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_process(ccm_state *ccm,
+                unsigned char *pt,
+                unsigned long  ptlen,
+                unsigned char *ct,
+                int  direction);
+\end{verbatim}
+This processes message data where \textit{pt} is the plaintext and \textit{ct} is the ciphertext.  The length of both are equal and stored in \textit{ptlen}.  Depending on
+the mode \textit{pt} is the input and \textit{ct} is the output (or vice versa).  When \textit{direction} equals \textbf{CCM\_ENCRYPT} the plaintext is read,
+encrypted and stored in the ciphertext buffer.  When \textit{direction} equals \textbf{CCM\_DECRYPT} the opposite occurs.
+
+\subsection{State Termination}
+To terminate a CCM state and retrieve the message authentication tag call the following function.
+
+\index{ccm\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_done(    ccm_state *ccm,
+             unsigned char *tag,
+             unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This terminates the CCM state \textit{ccm} and stores the tag in \textit{tag} of length \textit{taglen} octets.
+
+\subsection{State Reset}
+The call to ccm\_init() will perform considerable pre--computation and if you're going to be dealing with a lot of packets
+it is very costly to have to call it repeatedly.  To aid in this endeavour, the reset function is provided.
+
+\index{ccm\_reset()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_reset(ccm_state *ccm);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will reset the CCM state \textit{ccm} to the state that ccm\_init() left it.  The user would then call ccm\_add\_nonce(), ccm\_add\_aad(), etc.
+
+\subsection{One--Shot Packet}
+To process a single packet under any given key the following helper function can be used.
+
+\index{ccm\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ccm_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+    symmetric_key       *uskey,
+    const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+    const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen,
+          unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+          unsigned char *ct,
+          unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long *taglen,
+                    int  direction);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the CCM state with the given key, nonce and AAD value then proceed to encrypt or decrypt the message text and store the final
+message tag.  The definition of the variables is the same as it is for all the manual functions.
+
+If you are processing many packets under the same key you shouldn't use this function as it invokes the pre--computation with each call.
+
+\subsection{Example Usage}
+The following is an example usage of how to use CCM over multiple packets with a shared secret key.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+
+int send_packet(const unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+                const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+                const unsigned char *aad,    unsigned long aadlen,
+                      ccm_state     *ccm)
+{
+   int           err;
+   unsigned long taglen;
+   unsigned char tag[16];
+
+   /* reset the state */
+   if ((err = ccm_reset(ccm)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* Add the nonce */
+   if ((err = ccm_add_nonce(ccm, nonce, noncelen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* Add the AAD (note: aad can be NULL if aadlen == 0) */
+   if ((err = ccm_add_aad(ccm, aad, aadlen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* process the plaintext */
+   if ((err =
+        ccm_process(ccm, pt, ptlen, pt, CCM_ENCRYPT)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* Finish up and get the MAC tag */
+   taglen = sizeof(tag);
+   if ((err = ccm_done(ccm, tag, &taglen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* ... send a header describing the lengths ... */
+
+   /* depending on the protocol and how nonce is
+    * generated you may have to send it too... */
+   send(socket, nonce, noncelen, 0);
+
+   /* send the aad */
+   send(socket, aad, aadlen, 0);
+
+   /* send the ciphertext */
+   send(socket, pt, ptlen, 0);
+
+   /* send the tag */
+   send(socket, tag, taglen, 0);
+
+   return CRYPT_OK;
+}
+
+int main(void)
+{
+   ccm_state     ccm;
+   unsigned char key[16], NONCE[12], pt[PACKET_SIZE];
+   int           err, x;
+   unsigned long ptlen;
+
+   /* somehow fill key/NONCE with random values */
+
+   /* register AES */
+   register_cipher(&aes_desc);
+
+   /* init the CCM state */
+   if ((err =
+        ccm_init(&ccm, find_cipher("aes"), key, 16, PACKET_SIZE, 16, size(NONCE))) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      whine_and_pout(err);
+   }
+
+   /* handle us some packets */
+   for (;;) {
+       ptlen = make_packet_we_want_to_send(pt);
+
+       /* use NONCE as counter (12 byte counter) */
+       for (x = 11; x >= 0; x--) {
+           if (++NONCE[x]) {
+              break;
+           }
+       }
+
+       if ((err = send_packet(pt, ptlen, NONCE, 12, NULL, 0, &ccm))
+           != CRYPT_OK) {
+           whine_and_pout(err);
+       }
+   }
+   return EXIT_SUCCESS;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{GCM Mode}
+Galois counter mode is an IEEE proposal for authenticated encryption (also it is a planned NIST standard).  Like EAX and OCB mode, it can be used in a streaming capacity
+however, unlike EAX it cannot accept \textit{additional authentication data} (meta--data) after plaintext has been processed.  This mode also only works with
+block ciphers with a 16--byte block.
+
+A GCM stream is meant to be processed in three modes, one after another.  First, the initialization vector (per session) data is processed.  This should be
+unique to every session.  Next, the the optional additional authentication data is processed, and finally the plaintext (or ciphertext depending on the direction).
+
+\subsection{Initialization}
+To initialize the GCM context with a secret key call the following function.
+
+\index{gcm\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_init(          gcm_state *gcm,
+                             int  cipher,
+             const unsigned char *key,
+                             int  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This initializes the GCM state \textit{gcm} for the given cipher indexed by \textit{cipher}, with a secret key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets.  The cipher
+chosen must have a 16--byte block size (e.g., AES).
+
+\subsection{Initialization Vector}
+After the state has been initialized (or reset) the next step is to add the session (or packet) initialization vector.  It should be unique per packet encrypted.
+
+\index{gcm\_add\_iv()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_add_iv(          gcm_state *gcm,
+               const unsigned char *IV,
+                     unsigned long  IVlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This adds the initialization vector octets from \textit{IV} of length \textit{IVlen} to the GCM state \textit{gcm}.  You can call this function as many times as required
+to process the entire IV.
+
+Note: the GCM protocols provides a \textit{shortcut} for 12--byte IVs where no pre-processing is to be done.  If you want to minimize per packet latency it is ideal
+to only use 12--byte IVs.  You can just increment it like a counter for each packet.
+
+\subsection{Additional Authentication Data}
+After the entire IV has been processed, the additional authentication data can be processed.  Unlike the IV, a packet/session does not require additional
+authentication data (AAD) for security.  The AAD is meant to be used as side--channel data you want to be authenticated with the packet.  Note:  once
+you begin adding AAD to the GCM state you cannot return to adding IV data until the state has been reset.
+
+\index{gcm\_add\_aad()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_add_aad(          gcm_state *gcm,
+                const unsigned char *adata,
+                      unsigned long  adatalen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This adds the additional authentication data \textit{adata} of length \textit{adatalen} to the GCM state \textit{gcm}.
+
+\subsection{Plaintext Processing}
+After the AAD has been processed, the plaintext (or ciphertext depending on the direction) can be processed.
+
+\index{gcm\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_process(    gcm_state *gcm,
+                unsigned char *pt,
+                unsigned long  ptlen,
+                unsigned char *ct,
+                          int  direction);
+\end{verbatim}
+This processes message data where \textit{pt} is the plaintext and \textit{ct} is the ciphertext.  The length of both are equal and stored in \textit{ptlen}.  Depending on
+the mode \textit{pt} is the input and \textit{ct} is the output (or vice versa).  When \textit{direction} equals \textbf{GCM\_ENCRYPT} the plaintext is read,
+encrypted and stored in the ciphertext buffer.  When \textit{direction} equals \textbf{GCM\_DECRYPT} the opposite occurs.
+
+\subsection{State Termination}
+To terminate a GCM state and retrieve the message authentication tag call the following function.
+
+\index{gcm\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_done(    gcm_state *gcm,
+             unsigned char *tag,
+             unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This terminates the GCM state \textit{gcm} and stores the tag in \textit{tag} of length \textit{taglen} octets.
+
+\subsection{State Reset}
+The call to gcm\_init() will perform considerable pre--computation (when \textbf{GCM\_TABLES} is defined) and if you're going to be dealing with a lot of packets
+it is very costly to have to call it repeatedly.  To aid in this endeavour, the reset function has been provided.
+
+\index{gcm\_reset()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_reset(gcm_state *gcm);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will reset the GCM state \textit{gcm} to the state that gcm\_init() left it.  The user would then call gcm\_add\_iv(), gcm\_add\_aad(), etc.
+
+\subsection{One--Shot Packet}
+To process a single packet under any given key the following helper function can be used.
+
+\index{gcm\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int gcm_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,
+          unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *IV,    unsigned long IVlen,
+    const unsigned char *adata, unsigned long adatalen,
+          unsigned char *pt,    unsigned long ptlen,
+          unsigned char *ct,
+          unsigned char *tag,   unsigned long *taglen,
+                    int  direction);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the GCM state with the given key, IV and AAD value then proceed to encrypt or decrypt the message text and store the final
+message tag.  The definition of the variables is the same as it is for all the manual functions.
+
+If you are processing many packets under the same key you shouldn't use this function as it invokes the pre--computation with each call.
+
+\subsection{Example Usage}
+The following is an example usage of how to use GCM over multiple packets with a shared secret key.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+
+int send_packet(const unsigned char *pt,  unsigned long ptlen,
+                const unsigned char *iv,  unsigned long ivlen,
+                const unsigned char *aad, unsigned long aadlen,
+                      gcm_state     *gcm)
+{
+   int           err;
+   unsigned long taglen;
+   unsigned char tag[16];
+
+   /* reset the state */
+   if ((err = gcm_reset(gcm)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* Add the IV */
+   if ((err = gcm_add_iv(gcm, iv, ivlen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* Add the AAD (note: aad can be NULL if aadlen == 0) */
+   if ((err = gcm_add_aad(gcm, aad, aadlen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* process the plaintext */
+   if ((err =
+        gcm_process(gcm, pt, ptlen, pt, GCM_ENCRYPT)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* Finish up and get the MAC tag */
+   taglen = sizeof(tag);
+   if ((err = gcm_done(gcm, tag, &taglen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* ... send a header describing the lengths ... */
+
+   /* depending on the protocol and how IV is
+    * generated you may have to send it too... */
+   send(socket, iv, ivlen, 0);
+
+   /* send the aad */
+   send(socket, aad, aadlen, 0);
+
+   /* send the ciphertext */
+   send(socket, pt, ptlen, 0);
+
+   /* send the tag */
+   send(socket, tag, taglen, 0);
+
+   return CRYPT_OK;
+}
+
+int main(void)
+{
+   gcm_state     gcm;
+   unsigned char key[16], IV[12], pt[PACKET_SIZE];
+   int           err, x;
+   unsigned long ptlen;
+
+   /* somehow fill key/IV with random values */
+
+   /* register AES */
+   register_cipher(&aes_desc);
+
+   /* init the GCM state */
+   if ((err =
+        gcm_init(&gcm, find_cipher("aes"), key, 16)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      whine_and_pout(err);
+   }
+
+   /* handle us some packets */
+   for (;;) {
+       ptlen = make_packet_we_want_to_send(pt);
+
+       /* use IV as counter (12 byte counter) */
+       for (x = 11; x >= 0; x--) {
+           if (++IV[x]) {
+              break;
+           }
+       }
+
+       if ((err = send_packet(pt, ptlen, iv, 12, NULL, 0, &gcm))
+           != CRYPT_OK) {
+           whine_and_pout(err);
+       }
+   }
+   return EXIT_SUCCESS;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{ChaCha20--Poly1305}
+
+This authenticated encryption is based on ChaCha20 stream cipher and Poly1305 authenticator.
+It is defined by \url{https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7539}.
+
+\subsection{Initialization}
+To initialize the ChaCha20--Poly1305 context with a secret key call the following function.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_init(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                             const unsigned char *key,
+                                   unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This initializes the ChaCha20--Poly1305 state \textit{st} with a secret key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen}
+octets (valid lengths: 32 or 16).
+
+\subsection{Initialization Vector}
+After the state has been initialized the next step is to add the initialization vector.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_setiv()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_setiv(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                              const unsigned char *iv,
+                                    unsigned long  ivlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This adds the initialization vector from \textit{iv} of length \textit{ivlen} octects (valid lengths: 8 or 12) to
+the ChaCha20--Poly1305 state \textit{st}.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_setiv\_rfc7905()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_setiv_rfc7905(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                                      const unsigned char *iv,
+                                            unsigned long  ivlen,
+                                                  ulong64  sequence_number);
+\end{verbatim}
+This also adds the initialization vector from \textit{iv} of length \textit{ivlen} octects (valid lengths: 8 or 12) to
+the state \textit{st} but it also incorporates 64bit \textit{sequence\_number} into IV as described in RFC7905.
+
+You can call only one of \textit{chacha20poly1305\_setiv} or \textit{chacha20poly1305\_setiv\_rfc7905}.
+
+\subsection{Additional Authentication Data}
+After the IV has been set, the additional authentication data can be processed.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_add\_aad()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_add_aad(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                                const unsigned char *adata,
+                                      unsigned long  adatalen);
+
+\end{verbatim}
+This adds the additional authentication data \textit{adata} of length \textit{adatalen} to the ChaCha20--Poly1305 state \textit{st}.
+
+\subsection{Encryption / Decryption}
+After the AAD has been processed, the plaintext (or ciphertext depending on the direction) can be processed.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_encrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_encrypt(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                                const unsigned char *in,
+                                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                                      unsigned char *out);
+\end{verbatim}
+This encrypts the data where \textit{in} is the plaintext and \textit{out} is the ciphertext. The length of both are equal and stored in \textit{inlen}.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_decrypt()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_decrypt(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                                const unsigned char *in,
+                                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                                      unsigned char *out);
+\end{verbatim}
+This decrypts the data where \textit{in} is the ciphertext and \textit{out} is the plaintext. The length of both are equal and stored in \textit{inlen}.
+
+\subsection{State Termination}
+To terminate a ChaCha20--Poly1305 state and retrieve the message authentication tag call the following function.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_done(chacha20poly1305_state *st,
+                                   unsigned char *tag,
+                                   unsigned long *taglen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This terminates the ChaCha20--Poly1305 state \textit{st} and stores the tag in \textit{tag} of length \textit{taglen} octets (always 16).
+
+\subsection{One--Shot Packet}
+To process a single packet under any given key the following helper function can be used.
+
+\index{chacha20poly1305\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chacha20poly1305_memory(const unsigned char *key,
+                                  unsigned long  keylen,
+                            const unsigned char *iv,
+                                  unsigned long  ivlen,
+                            const unsigned char *aad,
+                                  unsigned long  aadlen,
+                            const unsigned char *in,
+                                  unsigned long  inlen,
+                                  unsigned char *out,
+                                  unsigned char *tag,
+                                  unsigned long *taglen,
+                                            int  direction);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will initialize the ChaCha20--Poly1305 state with the given key, IV and AAD value then proceed to
+encrypt (\textit{direction} equals \textbf{CHACHA20POLY1305\_ENCRYPT}) or decrypt (\textit{direction} equals
+\textbf{CHACHA20POLY1305\_DECRYPT}) the message text and store the final message tag. The definition of the
+variables is the same as it is for all the manual functions.
+
+\chapter{One-Way Cryptographic Hash Functions}
+\mysection{Core Functions}
+Like the ciphers, there are hash core functions and a universal data type to hold the hash state called \textit{hash\_state}.  To initialize hash
+XXX (where XXX is the name) call:
+\index{Hash Functions}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void XXX_init(hash_state *md);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This simply sets up the hash to the default state governed by the specifications of the hash.  To add data to the message being hashed call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_process(         hash_state *md,
+                const unsigned char *in,
+                      unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+Essentially all hash messages are virtually infinitely\footnote{Most hashes are limited to $2^{64}$ bits or 2,305,843,009,213,693,952 bytes.} long message which
+are buffered.  In the case where this limit is reached the \textit{XXX\_process()} function returns \textit{CRYPT\_HASH\_OVERFLOW}.
+\index{CRYPT\_HASH\_OVERFLOW}
+The data can be passed in any sized chunks as long as the order of the bytes are the same, the message digest (hash output) will be the same.  For example, this means that:
+\begin{verbatim}
+md5_process(&md, "hello ", 6);
+md5_process(&md, "world", 5);
+\end{verbatim}
+Will produce the same message digest as the single call:
+\index{Message Digest}
+\begin{verbatim}
+md5_process(&md, "hello world", 11);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To finally get the message digest (the hash) call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_done(   hash_state *md,
+             unsigned char *out);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function will finish up the hash and store the result in the \textit{out} array.  You must ensure that \textit{out} is long
+enough for the hash in question.  Often hashes are used to get keys for symmetric ciphers so the \textit{XXX\_done()} functions
+will wipe the \textit{md} variable before returning automatically.
+
+To test a hash function call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the hash matches the test vectors, otherwise it returns an error code.  An
+example snippet that hashes a message with md5 is given below.
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+    hash_state md;
+    unsigned char *in = "hello world", out[16];
+
+    /* setup the hash */
+    md5_init(&md);
+
+    /* add the message */
+    md5_process(&md, in, strlen(in));
+
+    /* get the hash in out[0..15] */
+    md5_done(&md, out);
+
+    return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{Hash Descriptors}
+Like the set of ciphers, the set of hashes have descriptors as well.  They are stored in an array called \textit{hash\_descriptor} and
+are defined by:
+\begin{verbatim}
+struct _hash_descriptor {
+    char *name;
+
+    unsigned long hashsize;    /* digest output size in bytes  */
+    unsigned long blocksize;   /* the block size the hash uses */
+
+    void (*init)   (hash_state *hash);
+
+    int  (*process)(         hash_state *hash,
+                    const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen);
+
+    int  (*done)   (hash_state *hash, unsigned char *out);
+
+    int  (*test)   (void);
+};
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\index{find\_hash()}
+The \textit{name} member is the name of the hash function (all lowercase).  The \textit{hashsize} member is the size of the digest output
+in bytes, while \textit{blocksize} is the size of blocks the hash expects to the compression function.  Technically, this detail is not important
+for high level developers but is useful to know for performance reasons.
+
+The \textit{init} member initializes the hash, \textit{process} passes data through the hash, \textit{done} terminates the hash and retrieves the
+digest.  The \textit{test} member tests the hash against the specified test vectors.
+
+There is a function to search the array as well called \textit{int find\_hash(char *name)}.  It returns -1 if the hash is not found, otherwise, the
+position in the descriptor table of the hash.
+
+In addition, there is also find\_hash\_oid() which finds a hash by the ASN.1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER string.
+\index{find\_hash\_oid()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int find_hash_oid(const unsigned long *ID, unsigned long IDlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You can use the table to indirectly call a hash function that is chosen at run-time.  For example:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   unsigned char buffer[100], hash[MAXBLOCKSIZE];
+   int idx, x;
+   hash_state md;
+
+   /* register hashes .... */
+   if (register_hash(&md5_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering MD5.\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* register other hashes ... */
+
+   /* prompt for name and strip newline */
+   printf("Enter hash name: \n");
+   fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), stdin);
+   buffer[strlen(buffer) - 1] = 0;
+
+   /* get hash index */
+   idx = find_hash(buffer);
+   if (idx == -1) {
+      printf("Invalid hash name!\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* hash input until blank line */
+   hash_descriptor[idx].init(&md);
+   while (fgets(buffer, sizeof(buffer), stdin) != NULL)
+         hash_descriptor[idx].process(&md, buffer, strlen(buffer));
+   hash_descriptor[idx].done(&md, hash);
+
+   /* dump to screen */
+   for (x = 0; x < hash_descriptor[idx].hashsize; x++)
+       printf("%02x ", hash[x]);
+   printf("\n");
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+Note the usage of \textbf{MAXBLOCKSIZE}.  In LibTomCrypt, no symmetric block, key or hash digest is larger than \textbf{MAXBLOCKSIZE} in
+length.  This provides a simple size you can set your automatic arrays to that will not get overrun.
+
+There are three helper functions to make working with hashes easier.  The first is a function to hash a buffer, and produce the digest in a single
+function call.
+
+\index{hash\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hash_memory(                int  hash,
+                const unsigned char *in,
+                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                      unsigned char *out,
+                      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will hash the data pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}.  The hash used is indexed by the \textit{hash} parameter.  The message
+digest is stored in \textit{out}, and the \textit{outlen} parameter is updated to hold the message digest size.
+
+The next helper function allows for the hashing of a file based on a file name.
+\index{hash\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hash_file(          int  hash,
+                 const char *fname,
+              unsigned char *out,
+              unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will hash the file named by \textit{fname} using the hash indexed by \textit{hash}.  The file named in this function call must be readable by the
+user owning the process performing the request.  This function can be omitted by the \textbf{LTC\_NO\_FILE} define, which forces it to return \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}
+when it is called.  The message digest is stored in \textit{out}, and the \textit{outlen} parameter is updated to hold the message digest size.
+
+\index{hash\_filehandle()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hash_filehandle(          int  hash,
+                             FILE *in,
+                    unsigned char *out,
+                    unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will hash the file identified by the handle \textit{in} using the hash indexed by \textit{hash}.  This will begin hashing from the current file pointer position, and
+will not rewind the file pointer when finished.  This function can be omitted by the \textbf{LTC\_NO\_FILE} define, which forces it to return \textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}
+when it is called.  The message digest is stored in \textit{out}, and the \textit{outlen} parameter is updated to hold the message digest size.
+
+To perform the above hash with md5 the following code could be used:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int idx, err;
+   unsigned long len;
+   unsigned char out[MAXBLOCKSIZE];
+
+   /* register the hash */
+   if (register_hash(&md5_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering MD5.\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* get the index of the hash  */
+   idx = find_hash("md5");
+
+   /* call the hash */
+   len = sizeof(out);
+   if ((err =
+       hash_memory(idx, "hello world", 11, out, &len)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error hashing data: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\subsection{Hash Registration}
+Similar to the cipher descriptor table you must register your hash algorithms before you can use them.  These functions
+work exactly like those of the cipher registration code.  The functions are:
+\index{register\_hash()} \index{unregister\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int register_hash(const struct _hash_descriptor *hash);
+
+int unregister_hash(const struct _hash_descriptor *hash);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The following hashes are provided as of this release within the LibTomCrypt library:
+\index{Hash descriptor table}
+
+\begin{figure}[H]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+      \hline \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Descriptor Name} & \textbf{Size of Message Digest (bytes)} \\
+      \hline WHIRLPOOL & whirlpool\_desc & 64 \\
+      \hline SHA3-512 & sha3\_512\_desc & 64 \\
+      \hline SHA-512 & sha512\_desc & 64 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2B-512 & blake2b\_512\_desc & 64 \\
+      \hline SHA3-384 & sha3\_384\_desc & 48 \\
+      \hline SHA-384 & sha384\_desc & 48 \\
+      \hline RIPEMD-320 & rmd160\_desc & 40 \\
+      \hline SHA-512/256 & sha512\_256\_desc & 32 \\
+      \hline SHA3-256 & sha3\_256\_desc & 32 \\
+      \hline SHA-256 & sha256\_desc & 32 \\
+      \hline RIPEMD-256 & rmd160\_desc & 32 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2S-256 & blake2s\_256\_desc & 32 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2B-256 & blake2b\_256\_desc & 32 \\
+      \hline SHA-512/224 & sha512\_224\_desc & 28 \\
+      \hline SHA3-224 & sha3\_224\_desc & 28 \\
+      \hline SHA-224 & sha224\_desc & 28 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2S-224 & blake2s\_224\_desc & 28 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2B-384 & blake2b\_384\_desc & 48 \\
+      \hline TIGER-192 & tiger\_desc & 24 \\
+      \hline SHA-1 & sha1\_desc & 20 \\
+      \hline RIPEMD-160 & rmd160\_desc & 20 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2S-160 & blake2s\_160\_desc & 20 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2B-160 & blake2b\_160\_desc & 20 \\
+      \hline RIPEMD-128 & rmd128\_desc & 16 \\
+      \hline MD5 & md5\_desc & 16 \\
+      \hline MD4 & md4\_desc & 16 \\
+      \hline MD2 & md2\_desc & 16 \\
+      \hline BLAKE2S-128 & blake2s\_128\_desc & 16 \\
+      \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\caption{Built--In Software Hashes}
+\end{figure}
+\vfil
+
+\mysection{Cipher Hash Construction}
+\index{Cipher Hash Construction}
+An addition to the suite of hash functions is the \textit{Cipher Hash Construction} or \textit{CHC} mode.  In this mode
+applicable block ciphers (such as AES) can be turned into hash functions that other LTC functions can use.  In
+particular this allows a cryptosystem to be designed using very few moving parts.
+
+In order to use the CHC system the developer will have to take a few extra steps.  First the \textit{chc\_desc} hash
+descriptor must be registered with register\_hash().  At this point the CHC hash cannot be used to hash
+data.  While it is in the hash system you still have to tell the CHC code which cipher to use.  This is accomplished
+via the chc\_register() function.
+
+\index{chc\_register()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int chc_register(int cipher);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+A cipher has to be registered with CHC (and also in the cipher descriptor tables with
+register\_cipher()).  The chc\_register() function will bind a cipher to the CHC system.  Only one cipher can
+be bound to the CHC hash at a time.  There are additional requirements for the system to work.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item The cipher must have a block size greater than 64--bits.
+   \item The cipher must allow an input key the size of the block size.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Example of using CHC with the AES block cipher.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int err;
+
+   /* register cipher and hash */
+   if (register_cipher(&aes_enc_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Could not register cipher\n");
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+   if (register_hash(&chc_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Could not register hash\n");
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* start chc with AES */
+   if ((err = chc_register(find_cipher("aes"))) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error binding AES to CHC: %s\n",
+             error_to_string(err));
+   }
+
+   /* now you can use chc_hash in any LTC function
+    * [aside from pkcs...] */
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{SHA3 SHAKE}
+The SHA3 class of algorithms provides a special XOF (Extendable Output Functions) mode, called SHAKE.
+SHAKE operates in 2 security configurations, 128bit or 256bit, and allows to generate message digests of an arbitrary length.
+
+For further information see \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SHA-3}
+
+Example of using SHAKE256 with an arbitrary length output.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int err;
+   hash_state state;
+   const void* msg = "The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog";
+   unsigned char output[345];
+
+   if ((err = sha3_shake_init(&state, 256)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Could not init SHAKE256 (%s)\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+   if ((err = sha3_shake_process(&state, msg, strlen(msg))) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Could not process SHAKE256 (%s)\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+   if ((err = sha3_shake_done(&state, output, sizeof(output))) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Could not finish SHAKE256 (%s)\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+   return EXIT_SUCCESS;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{Notice}
+It is highly recommended that you \textbf{not} use the MD2, MD4, MD5, or SHA-1 hashes for the purposes of digital signatures or authentication codes.
+These hashes are provided for completeness and they still can be used for the purposes of password hashing or one-way accumulators
+(e.g. Yarrow).
+
+The other hashes such as the SHA-2 (that includes SHA-512, SHA-512/384, SHA-384, SHA-512/256, SHA-256 and SHA-224) and TIGER-192 are still considered secure
+for all purposes you would normally use a hash for.
+
+\chapter{Checksum Functions}
+
+\mysection{Preface}
+
+The API for all checksum functions operate in mode: \textit{init} -- \textit{update} -- \textit{update} -- ... -- \textit{finish}.
+
+The \textit{finish} functions allow to output a partial result if necessary.
+
+\mysection{CRC-32 -- Cyclic redundancy check}
+
+A Cyclic Redundancy Check is an error-detecting code, where LibTomCrypt implements CRC-32 with the polynomial \textit{0x04C11DB7}.
+
+For further information see \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cyclic_redundancy_check}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+void crc32_init(crc32_state *ctx);
+void crc32_update(crc32_state *ctx, const unsigned char *input, unsigned long length);
+void crc32_finish(crc32_state *ctx, void *hash, unsigned long size);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{Adler-32}
+
+Adler-32 is a checksum algorithm.
+
+For further information see \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Adler-32}.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+void adler32_init(adler32_state *ctx);
+void adler32_update(adler32_state *ctx, const unsigned char *input, unsigned long length);
+void adler32_finish(adler32_state *ctx, void *hash, unsigned long size);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\chapter{Message Authentication Codes}
+\mysection{HMAC Protocol}
+Thanks to Dobes Vandermeer, the library now includes support for hash based message authentication codes, or HMAC for short.  An HMAC
+of a message is a keyed authentication code that only the owner of a private symmetric key will be able to verify.  The purpose is
+to allow an owner of a private symmetric key to produce an HMAC on a message then later verify if it is correct.  Any impostor or
+eavesdropper will not be able to verify the authenticity of a message.
+
+The HMAC support works much like the normal hash functions except that the initialization routine requires you to pass a key
+and its length.  The key is much like a key you would pass to a cipher.  That is, it is simply an array of octets stored in
+unsigned characters.  The initialization routine is:
+\index{hmac\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hmac_init(         hmac_state *hmac,
+                              int  hash,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                    unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+The \textit{hmac} parameter is the state for the HMAC code.  The \textit{hash} parameter is the index into the descriptor table of the hash you want
+to use to authenticate the message.  The \textit{key} parameter is the pointer to the array of chars that make up the key.  The \textit{keylen} parameter is the
+length (in octets) of the key you want to use to authenticate the message.  To send octets of a message through the HMAC system you must use the following function:
+\index{hmac\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hmac_process(         hmac_state *hmac,
+                 const unsigned char *in,
+                       unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\textit{hmac} is the HMAC state you are working with. \textit{in} is the array of octets to send into the HMAC process.  \textit{inlen} is the
+number of octets to process.  Like the hash process routines, you can send the data in arbitrarily sized chunks. When you
+are finished with the HMAC process you must call the following function to get the HMAC code:
+\index{hmac\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hmac_done(   hmac_state *hmac,
+              unsigned char *out,
+              unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+The \textit{hmac} parameter is the HMAC state you are working with.  The \textit{out} parameter is the array of octets where the HMAC code should be stored.
+You must set \textit{outlen} to the size of the destination buffer before calling this function.  It is updated with the length of the HMAC code
+produced (depending on which hash was picked).  If \textit{outlen} is less than the size of the message digest (and ultimately
+the HMAC code) then the HMAC code is truncated as per FIPS-198 specifications (e.g. take the first \textit{outlen} bytes).
+
+There are two utility functions provided to make using HMACs easier to do.  They accept the key and information about the
+message (file pointer, address in memory), and produce the HMAC result in one shot.  These are useful if you want to avoid
+calling the three step process yourself.
+
+\index{hmac\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hmac_memory(
+                   int  hash,
+   const unsigned char *key, unsigned long  keylen,
+   const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long  inlen,
+         unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will produce an HMAC code for the array of octets in \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}.  The index into the hash descriptor
+table must be provided in \textit{hash}.  It uses the key from \textit{key} with a key length of \textit{keylen}.
+The result is stored in the array of octets \textit{out} and the length in \textit{outlen}.  The value of \textit{outlen} must be set
+to the size of the destination buffer before calling this function.  Similarly for files there is the  following function:
+\index{hmac\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hmac_file(
+                   int  hash,
+            const char *fname,
+   const unsigned char *key, unsigned long  keylen,
+         unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\textit{hash} is the index into the hash descriptor table of the hash you want to use.  \textit{fname} is the filename to process.
+\textit{key} is the array of octets to use as the key of length \textit{keylen}.  \textit{out} is the array of octets where the
+result should be stored.
+
+To test if the HMAC code is working there is the following function:
+\index{hmac\_test()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int hmac_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the code passes otherwise it returns an error code.  Some example code for using the
+HMAC system is given below.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int idx, err;
+   hmac_state hmac;
+   unsigned char key[16], dst[MAXBLOCKSIZE];
+   unsigned long dstlen;
+
+   /* register SHA-1 */
+   if (register_hash(&sha1_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering SHA1\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* get index of SHA1 in hash descriptor table */
+   idx = find_hash("sha1");
+
+   /* we would make up our symmetric key in "key[]" here */
+
+   /* start the HMAC */
+   if ((err = hmac_init(&hmac, idx, key, 16)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error setting up hmac: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* process a few octets */
+   if((err = hmac_process(&hmac, "hello", 5) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error processing hmac: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* get result (presumably to use it somehow...) */
+   dstlen = sizeof(dst);
+   if ((err = hmac_done(&hmac, dst, &dstlen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error finishing hmac: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+   printf("The hmac is %lu bytes long\n", dstlen);
+
+   /* return */
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{OMAC Support}
+\index{OMAC} \index{CMAC}
+OMAC\footnote{\url{http://crypt.cis.ibaraki.ac.jp/omac/omac.html}}, which stands for \textit{One-Key CBC MAC} is an
+algorithm which produces a Message Authentication Code (MAC) using only a block cipher such as AES.  Note:  OMAC has been standardized as
+CMAC within NIST, for the purposes of this library OMAC and CMAC are synonymous.  From an API standpoint, the OMAC routines work much like the
+HMAC routines.  Instead, in this case a cipher is used instead of a hash.
+
+To start an OMAC state you call
+\index{omac\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int omac_init(         omac_state *omac,
+                              int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                    unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+The \textit{omac} parameter is the state for the OMAC algorithm.  The \textit{cipher} parameter is the index into the cipher\_descriptor table
+of the cipher\footnote{The cipher must have a 64 or 128 bit block size.  Such as CAST5, Blowfish, DES, AES, Twofish, etc.} you
+wish to use.  The \textit{key} and \textit{keylen} parameters are the keys used to authenticate the data.
+
+To send data through the algorithm call
+\index{omac\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int omac_process(         omac_state *state,
+                 const unsigned char *in,
+                       unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will send \textit{inlen} bytes from \textit{in} through the active OMAC state \textit{state}.  Returns \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if the
+function succeeds.  The function is not sensitive to the granularity of the data.  For example,
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+omac_process(&mystate, "hello",  5);
+omac_process(&mystate, " world", 6);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Would produce the same result as,
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+omac_process(&mystate, "hello world",  11);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+When you are done processing the message you can call the following to compute the message tag.
+
+\index{omac\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int omac_done(   omac_state *state,
+              unsigned char *out,
+              unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which will terminate the OMAC and output the \textit{tag} (MAC) to \textit{out}.  Note that unlike the HMAC and other code
+\textit{outlen} can be smaller than the default MAC size (for instance AES would make a 16-byte tag).  Part of the OMAC
+specification states that the output may be truncated.  So if you pass in $outlen = 5$ and use AES as your cipher than
+the output MAC code will only be five bytes long.  If \textit{outlen} is larger than the default size it is set to the default
+size to show how many bytes were actually used.
+
+Similar to the HMAC code the file and memory functions are also provided.  To OMAC a buffer of memory in one shot use the
+following function.
+
+\index{omac\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int omac_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen,
+    const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long inlen,
+          unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will compute the OMAC of \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes and the cipher
+specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same
+rules as omac\_done.
+
+To OMAC a file use
+\index{omac\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int omac_file(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,      unsigned long keylen,
+             const char *filename,
+          unsigned char *out,      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will OMAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes
+and the cipher specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with
+the same rules as omac\_done.
+
+To test if the OMAC code is working there is the following function:
+\index{omac\_test()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int omac_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the code passes otherwise it returns an error code.  Some example code for using the
+OMAC system is given below.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int idx, err;
+   omac_state omac;
+   unsigned char key[16], dst[MAXBLOCKSIZE];
+   unsigned long dstlen;
+
+   /* register Rijndael */
+   if (register_cipher(&rijndael_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering Rijndael\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* get index of Rijndael in cipher descriptor table */
+   idx = find_cipher("rijndael");
+
+   /* we would make up our symmetric key in "key[]" here */
+
+   /* start the OMAC */
+   if ((err = omac_init(&omac, idx, key, 16)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error setting up omac: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* process a few octets */
+   if((err = omac_process(&omac, "hello", 5) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error processing omac: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* get result (presumably to use it somehow...) */
+   dstlen = sizeof(dst);
+   if ((err = omac_done(&omac, dst, &dstlen)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error finishing omac: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+   printf("The omac is %lu bytes long\n", dstlen);
+
+   /* return */
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{PMAC Support}
+The PMAC\footnote{J.Black, P.Rogaway, \textit{A Block--Cipher Mode of Operation for Parallelizable Message Authentication}}
+protocol is another MAC algorithm that relies solely on a symmetric-key block cipher.  It uses essentially the same
+API as the provided OMAC code.
+
+A PMAC state is initialized with the following.
+
+\index{pmac\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pmac_init(         pmac_state *pmac,
+                              int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                    unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which initializes the \textit{pmac} state with the given \textit{cipher} and \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes.  The chosen cipher
+must have a 64 or 128 bit block size (e.x. AES).
+
+To MAC data simply send it through the process function.
+
+\index{pmac\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pmac_process(         pmac_state *state,
+                 const unsigned char *in,
+                       unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will process \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in} in the given \textit{state}.  The function is not sensitive to the granularity of the
+data.  For example,
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+pmac_process(&mystate, "hello",  5);
+pmac_process(&mystate, " world", 6);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Would produce the same result as,
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+pmac_process(&mystate, "hello world",  11);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+When a complete message has been processed the following function can be called to compute the message tag.
+
+\index{pmac\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pmac_done(   pmac_state *state,
+              unsigned char *out,
+              unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will store up to \textit{outlen} bytes of the tag for the given \textit{state} into \textit{out}.  Note that if \textit{outlen} is larger
+than the size of the tag it is set to the amount of bytes stored in \textit{out}.
+
+Similar to the OMAC code the file and memory functions are also provided.  To PMAC a buffer of memory in one shot use the
+following function.
+
+\index{pmac\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pmac_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key, unsigned long  keylen,
+    const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will compute the PMAC of \textit{msglen} bytes of \textit{msg} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher
+specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same
+rules as pmac\_done().
+
+To PMAC a file use
+\index{pmac\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pmac_file(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,      unsigned long keylen,
+             const char *filename,
+          unsigned char *out,      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will PMAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes,
+and the cipher specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with
+the same rules as pmac\_done().
+
+To test if the PMAC code is working there is the following function:
+\index{pmac\_test()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pmac_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the code passes otherwise it returns an error code.
+
+\mysection{Pelican MAC}
+Pelican MAC is a new (experimental) MAC by the AES team that uses four rounds of AES as a \textit{mixing function}.  It achieves a very high
+rate of processing and is potentially very secure.  It requires AES to be enabled to function.  You do not have to register\_cipher() AES first though
+as it calls AES directly.
+
+\index{pelican\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pelican_init(      pelican_state *pelmac,
+                 const unsigned char *key,
+                       unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will initialize the Pelican state with the given AES key.  Once this has been done you can begin processing data.
+
+\index{pelican\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pelican_process(      pelican_state *pelmac,
+                    const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will process \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in} through the Pelican MAC.  It's best that you pass in multiples of 16 bytes as it makes the
+routine more efficient but you may pass in any length of text.  You can call this function as many times as required to process
+an entire message.
+
+\index{pelican\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pelican_done(pelican_state *pelmac, unsigned char *out);
+\end{verbatim}
+This terminates a Pelican MAC and writes the 16--octet tag to \textit{out}.
+
+\subsection{Example}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   pelican_state pelstate;
+   unsigned char key[32], tag[16];
+   int           err;
+
+   /* somehow initialize a key */
+
+   /* initialize pelican mac */
+   if ((err = pelican_init(&pelstate, /* the state */
+                           key,       /* user key */
+                           32         /* key length in octets */
+                          )) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error initializing Pelican: %s",
+              error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* MAC some data */
+   if ((err = pelican_process(&pelstate,       /* the state */
+                              "hello world",   /* data to mac */
+                              11               /* length of data */
+                              )) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error processing Pelican: %s",
+             error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* Terminate the MAC */
+   if ((err = pelican_done(&pelstate,/* the state */
+                           tag       /* where to store the tag */
+                           )) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error terminating Pelican: %s",
+             error_to_string(err));
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* tag[0..15] has the MAC output now */
+
+   return EXIT_SUCCESS;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{XCBC-MAC}
+As of LibTomCrypt v1.15, XCBC-MAC (RFC 3566) has been provided to support TLS encryption suites.  Like OMAC, it computes a message authentication code
+by using a cipher in CBC mode.  It also uses a single key which it expands into the requisite three keys for the MAC function.  A XCBC--MAC state is
+initialized with the following function:
+
+\index{xcbc\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xcbc_init(         xcbc_state *xcbc,
+                              int  cipher,
+              const unsigned char *key,
+                    unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the XCBC--MAC state \textit{xcbc}, with the key specified in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets.  The cipher indicated
+by the \textit{cipher} index can be either a 64 or 128--bit block cipher.  This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.
+
+\index{LTC\_XCBC\_PURE}
+It is possible to use XCBC in a three key mode by OR'ing the value \textbf{LTC\_XCBC\_PURE} against the \textit{keylen} parameter.  In this mode, the key is
+interpretted as three keys.  If the cipher has a block size of $n$ octets, the first key is then $keylen - 2n$ octets and is the encryption key.  The next
+$2n$ octets are the $K_1$ and $K_2$ padding keys (used on the last block).  For example, to use AES--192 \textit{keylen} should be $24 + 2 \cdot 16 = 56$ octets.
+The three keys are interpretted as if they were concatenated in the \textit{key} buffer.
+
+
+To process data through XCBC--MAC use the following function:
+
+\index{xcbc\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xcbc_process(         xcbc_state *state,
+                 const unsigned char *in,
+                       unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will add the message octets pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the XCBC--MAC state pointed to by \textit{state}.  Like the other MAC functions,
+the granularity of the input is not important but the order is.  This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.
+
+To compute the MAC tag value use the following function:
+
+\index{xcbc\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xcbc_done(   xcbc_state *state,
+              unsigned char *out,
+              unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will retrieve the XCBC--MAC tag from the state pointed to by \textit{state}, and store it in the array pointed to by \textit{out}.  The \textit{outlen} parameter
+specifies the maximum size of the destination buffer, and is updated to hold the final size of the tag when the function returns.  This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.
+
+Helper functions are provided to make parsing memory buffers and files easier.  The following functions are provided:
+
+\index{xcbc\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xcbc_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key, unsigned long  keylen,
+    const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will compute the XCBC--MAC of \textit{msglen} bytes of \textit{msg}, using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher
+specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as xcbc\_done().
+
+To xcbc a file use
+\index{xcbc\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xcbc_file(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,      unsigned long keylen,
+             const char *filename,
+          unsigned char *out,      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will XCBC--MAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher
+specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as xcbc\_done().
+
+
+To test XCBC--MAC for RFC 3566 compliance use the following function:
+
+\index{xcbc\_test()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int xcbc_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.  This requires the AES or Rijndael descriptor be previously registered, otherwise, it will return
+\textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}.
+
+\mysection{F9--MAC}
+The F9--MAC is yet another CBC--MAC variant proposed for the 3GPP standard.  Originally specified to be used with the KASUMI block cipher, it can also be used
+with other ciphers.  For LibTomCrypt, the F9--MAC code can use any cipher.
+
+\subsection{Usage Notice}
+F9--MAC differs slightly from the other MAC functions in that it requires the caller to perform the final message padding.  The padding quite simply is a direction
+bit followed by a 1 bit and enough zeros to make the message a multiple of the cipher block size.  If the message is byte aligned, the padding takes on the form of
+a single 0x40 or 0xC0 byte followed by enough 0x00 bytes to make the message proper multiple.
+
+If the user simply wants a MAC function (hint: use OMAC) padding with a single 0x40 byte should be sufficient for security purposes and still be reasonably compatible
+with F9--MAC.
+
+\subsection{F9--MAC Functions}
+A F9--MAC state is initialized with the following function:
+\index{f9\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f9_init(           f9_state *f9,
+                            int  cipher,
+            const unsigned char *key,
+                  unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialize the F9--MAC state \textit{f9}, with the key specified in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets.  The cipher indicated
+by the \textit{cipher} index can be either a 64 or 128--bit block cipher.  This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.
+
+To process data through F9--MAC use the following function:
+\index{f9\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f9_process(           f9_state *state,
+               const unsigned char *in,
+                     unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will add the message octets pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the F9--MAC state pointed to by \textit{state}.  Like the other MAC functions,
+the granularity of the input is not important but the order is.  This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.
+
+To compute the MAC tag value use the following function:
+
+\index{f9\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f9_done(     f9_state *state,
+            unsigned char *out,
+            unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will retrieve the F9--MAC tag from the state pointed to by \textit{state}, and store it in the array pointed to by \textit{out}.  The \textit{outlen} parameter
+specifies the maximum size of the destination buffer, and is updated to hold the final size of the tag when the function returns.  This will return
+\textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.
+
+Helper functions are provided to make parsing memory buffers and files easier.  The following functions are provided:
+
+\index{f9\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f9_memory(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key, unsigned long  keylen,
+    const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will compute the F9--MAC of \textit{msglen} bytes of \textit{msg}, using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher
+specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as f9\_done().
+
+To F9--MAC a file use
+\index{f9\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f9_file(
+                    int  cipher,
+    const unsigned char *key,      unsigned long keylen,
+             const char *filename,
+          unsigned char *out,      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will F9--MAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{filename} using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes, and the cipher
+specified by the \textit{cipher}'th entry in the cipher\_descriptor table.  It will store the MAC in \textit{out} with the same rules as f9\_done().
+
+
+To test f9--MAC for RFC 3566 compliance use the following function:
+
+\index{f9\_test()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int f9_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} on success.  This requires the AES or Rijndael descriptor be previously registered, otherwise, it will return
+\textbf{CRYPT\_NOP}.
+
+\mysection{Poly1305--MAC}
+
+The Poly1305--MAC is a cryptographic message authentication code created by Daniel J. Bernstein.
+More info at \url{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Poly1305}.
+
+A Poly1305--MAC state is initialized with the following function:
+\index{poly1305\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int poly1305_init(     poly1305_state *st,
+                  const unsigned char *key,
+                        unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will initialize the Poly1305--MAC state \textit{st}, with the key specified in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets (always 32).
+
+To process data through Poly1305--MAC use the following function:
+\index{poly1305\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int poly1305_process(     poly1305_state *st,
+                     const unsigned char *in,
+                           unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will add the message octets pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the Poly1305--MAC state pointed to by \textit{st}.
+
+To compute the MAC tag value use the following function:
+\index{poly1305\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int poly1305_done(poly1305_state *st,
+                   unsigned char *mac,
+                   unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will retrieve the Poly1305--MAC tag from the state pointed to by \textit{st}, and store it in the array pointed to by \textit{mac}.
+The \textit{maclen} parameter specifies the maximum size of the destination buffer, and is updated to hold the final size of the tag when
+the function returns.
+
+Helper functions are provided to make parsing memory buffers and files easier. The following functions are provided:
+\index{poly1305\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int poly1305_memory(const unsigned char *key,
+                          unsigned long  keylen,
+                    const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                          unsigned char *mac,
+                          unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will compute the Poly1305--MAC of \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in}, using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes.
+It will store the MAC in \textit{mac} with the same rules as poly1305\_done().
+
+To Poly1305--MAC a file use
+\index{poly1305\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int poly1305_file(         const char *fname,
+                  const unsigned char *key,
+                        unsigned long  keylen,
+                        unsigned char *mac,
+                        unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will Poly1305--MAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{fname} using the key \textit{key} of
+length \textit{keylen} bytes. It will store the MAC in \textit{mac} with the same rules as poly1305\_done().
+
+\mysection{BLAKE2s + BLAKE2b MAC}
+
+The BLAKE2s and BLAKE2b are cryptographic message authentication code designed by Jean--Philippe Aumasson,
+Samuel Neves, Zooko Wilcox-O'Hearn, and Christian Winnerlein. More info at \url{https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7693}.
+
+A BLAKE2s/b--MAC state is initialized with the following function:
+\index{blake2smac\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2smac_init(blake2smac_state *st,
+                       unsigned long  outlen,
+                 const unsigned char *key,
+                       unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\index{blake2bmac\_init()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2bmac_init(blake2smac_state *st,
+                       unsigned long  outlen,
+                 const unsigned char *key,
+                       unsigned long  keylen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will initialize the BLAKE2s/b--MAC state \textit{st}, with the key specified in \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets (up to 64).
+The \textit{outlen} specifies the size of the final tag (up to 64 octets).
+
+To process data through BLAKE2s/b--MAC use the following function:
+\index{blake2smac\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2smac_process(   blake2smac_state *st,
+                       const unsigned char *in,
+                             unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\index{blake2bmac\_process()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2bmac_process(   blake2bmac_state *st,
+                       const unsigned char *in,
+                             unsigned long  inlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will add the message octets pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the BLAKE2s/b--MAC state pointed to by \textit{st}.
+
+To compute the MAC tag value use the following function:
+\index{blake2smac\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2smac_done(blake2smac_state *st,
+                       unsigned char *mac,
+                       unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\index{blake2bmac\_done()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2bmac_done(blake2bmac_state *st,
+                       unsigned char *mac,
+                       unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will retrieve the BLAKE2s/b--MAC tag from the state pointed to by \textit{st}, and store it in the array pointed to by \textit{mac}.
+The \textit{maclen} parameter specifies the maximum size of the destination buffer, and is updated to hold the final size of the tag when
+the function returns.
+
+Helper functions are provided to make parsing memory buffers and files easier. The following functions are provided:
+\index{blake2smac\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2smac_memory(const unsigned char *key,
+                            unsigned long  keylen,
+                      const unsigned char *in,
+                            unsigned long  inlen,
+                            unsigned char *mac,
+                            unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\index{blake2bmac\_memory()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2bmac_memory(const unsigned char *key,
+                            unsigned long  keylen,
+                      const unsigned char *in,
+                            unsigned long  inlen,
+                            unsigned char *mac,
+                            unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will compute the BLAKE2s/b--MAC of \textit{inlen} bytes of \textit{in}, using the key \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} bytes.
+It will store the MAC in \textit{mac} with the same rules as blake2smac\_done().
+
+To BLAKE2s/b--MAC a file use
+\index{blake2smac\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2smac_file(         const char *fname,
+                    const unsigned char *key,
+                          unsigned long  keylen,
+                          unsigned char *mac,
+                          unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+\index{blake2bmac\_file()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int blake2bmac_file(         const char *fname,
+                    const unsigned char *key,
+                          unsigned long  keylen,
+                          unsigned char *mac,
+                          unsigned long *maclen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will BLAKE2s/b--MAC the entire contents of the file specified by \textit{fname} using the key \textit{key} of
+length \textit{keylen} bytes. It will store the MAC in \textit{mac} with the same rules as blake2smac\_done().
+
+\chapter{Pseudo-Random Number Generators}
+\mysection{Core Functions}
+The library provides an array of core functions for Pseudo-Random Number Generators (PRNGs) as well.  A cryptographic PRNG is
+used to expand a shorter bit string into a longer bit string.  PRNGs are used wherever random data is required such as Public Key (PK)
+key generation.  There is a universal structure called \textit{prng\_state}.  To initialize a PRNG call:
+\index{PRNG start}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_start(prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will setup the PRNG for future use and not seed it.  In order for the PRNG to be cryptographically useful you must give it
+entropy.  Ideally you'd have some OS level source to tap like in UNIX.  To add entropy to the PRNG call:
+\index{PRNG add\_entropy}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_add_entropy(const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                             prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if the entropy was accepted.  Once you think you have enough entropy you call another
+function to put the entropy into action.
+\index{PRNG ready}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_ready(prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which returns {\bf CRYPT\_OK} if it is ready.  Finally to actually read bytes call:
+\index{PRNG read}
+\begin{verbatim}
+unsigned long XXX_read(unsigned char *out,
+                       unsigned long  outlen,
+                          prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which returns the number of bytes read from the PRNG.  When you are finished with a PRNG state you call
+the following.
+
+\index{PRNG done}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void XXX_done(prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will terminate a PRNG state and free any memory (if any) allocated.  To export a PRNG state
+so that you can later resume the PRNG call the following.
+
+\index{PRNG export}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_export(unsigned char *out,
+               unsigned long *outlen,
+                  prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will write a \textit{PRNG state} to the buffer \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} bytes.  The idea of
+the export is meant to be used as a \textit{seed file}.  That is, when the program starts up there will not likely
+be that much entropy available.   To import a state to seed a PRNG call the following function.
+
+\index{PRNG import}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_import(const unsigned char *in,
+                     unsigned long  inlen,
+                        prng_state *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will call the start and add\_entropy functions of the given PRNG.  It will use the state in
+\textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} as the initial seed.  You must pass the same seed length as was exported
+by the corresponding export function.
+
+Note that importing a state will not \textit{resume} the PRNG from where it left off.  That is, if you export
+a state, emit (say) 8 bytes and then import the previously exported state the next 8 bytes will not
+specifically equal the 8 bytes you generated previously.
+
+When a program is first executed the normal course of operation is:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item Gather entropy from your sources for a given period of time or number of events.
+   \item Start, use your entropy via add\_entropy and ready the PRNG yourself.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+When your program is finished you simply call the export function and save the state to a medium (disk,
+flash memory, etc).  The next time your application starts up you can detect the state, feed it to the
+import function and go on your way.  It is ideal that (as soon as possible) after start up you export a
+fresh state.  This helps in the case that the program aborts or the machine is powered down without
+being given a chance to exit properly.
+
+Note that even if you have a state to import it is important to add new entropy to the state.  However,
+there is less pressure to do so.
+
+To test a PRNG for operational conformity call the following functions.
+
+\index{PRNG test}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int XXX_test(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if PRNG is operating properly.
+
+\subsection{Remarks}
+
+It is possible to be adding entropy and reading from a PRNG at the same time.  For example, if you first seed the PRNG
+and call ready() you can now read from it.  You can also keep adding new entropy to it.  The new entropy will not be used
+in the PRNG until ready() is called again.  This allows the PRNG to be used and re-seeded at the same time.  No real error
+checking is guaranteed to see if the entropy is sufficient, or if the PRNG is even in a ready state before reading.
+
+\subsection{Example}
+Below is a simple snippet to read 10 bytes from Yarrow.  It is important to note that this snippet is {\bf NOT} secure since
+the entropy added is not random.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   prng_state prng;
+   unsigned char buf[10];
+   int err;
+
+   /* start it */
+   if ((err = yarrow_start(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Start error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+   }
+   /* add entropy */
+   if ((err = yarrow_add_entropy("hello world", 11, &prng))
+       != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Add_entropy error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+   }
+   /* ready and read */
+   if ((err = yarrow_ready(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Ready error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+   }
+   printf("Read %lu bytes from yarrow\n",
+          yarrow_read(buf, sizeof(buf), &prng));
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{PRNG Descriptors}
+\index{PRNG Descriptor}
+PRNGs have descriptors that allow plugin driven functions to be created using PRNGs. The plugin descriptors are stored in the structure \textit{prng\_descriptor}.  The
+format of an element is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+struct _prng_descriptor {
+    char *name;
+    int  export_size;    /* size in bytes of exported state */
+
+    int (*start)      (prng_state *);
+
+    int (*add_entropy)(const unsigned char *, unsigned long,
+                       prng_state *);
+
+    int (*ready)      (prng_state *);
+
+    unsigned long (*read)(unsigned char *, unsigned long len,
+                          prng_state *);
+
+    void (*done)(prng_state *);
+
+    int (*pexport)(unsigned char *, unsigned long *, prng_state *);
+
+    int (*pimport)(const unsigned char *, unsigned long, prng_state *);
+
+    int (*test)(void);
+};
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To find a PRNG in the descriptor table the following function can be used:
+\index{find\_prng()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int find_prng(const char *name);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will search the PRNG descriptor table for the PRNG named \textit{name}.  It will return -1 if the PRNG is not found, otherwise, it returns
+the index into the descriptor table.
+
+Just like the ciphers and hashes, you must register your prng before you can use it.  The two functions provided work exactly as those for the cipher registry functions.
+They are the following:
+\index{register\_prng()} \index{unregister\_prng()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int register_prng(const struct _prng_descriptor *prng);
+int unregister_prng(const struct _prng_descriptor *prng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The register function will register the PRNG, and return the index into the table where it was placed (or -1 for error).  It will avoid registering the same
+descriptor twice, and will return the index of the current placement in the table if the caller attempts to register it more than once.  The unregister function
+will return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if the PRNG was found and removed.  Otherwise, it returns \textbf{CRYPT\_ERROR}.
+
+\subsection{PRNGs Provided}
+\begin{figure}[H]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|l|}
+\hline \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Descriptor} & \textbf{Usage} \\
+\hline ChaCha20 & chacha20\_prng\_desc & Stream Cipher PRNG (recommended, fast) \\
+\hline Fortuna & fortuna\_desc & Fast long-term PRNG (recommended, secure) \\
+\hline RC4 & rc4\_desc & Stream Cipher PRNG \\
+\hline SOBER-128 & sober128\_desc & Stream Cipher PRNG \\
+\hline sprng & sprng\_desc & Secure PRNG using the System RNG \\
+\hline Yarrow & yarrow\_desc & Fast short-term PRNG \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{small}
+\end{center}
+\caption{List of Provided PRNGs}
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsubsection{Yarrow}
+Yarrow is fast PRNG meant to collect an unspecified amount of entropy from sources
+(keyboard, mouse, interrupts, etc), and produce an unbounded string of random bytes.
+
+\textit{Note:} This PRNG is still secure for most tasks but is no longer recommended.  Users
+should use Fortuna or ChaCha20 instead.
+
+\subsubsection{Fortuna}
+
+Fortuna is a fast attack tolerant and more thoroughly designed PRNG suitable for long term
+usage.  It is faster than the default implementation of Yarrow\footnote{Yarrow has been implemented
+to work with most cipher and hash combos based on which you have chosen to build into the library.} while
+providing more security.
+
+Fortuna is slightly less flexible than Yarrow in the sense that it only works with the AES block cipher
+and SHA--256 hash function.  Technically, Fortuna will work with any block cipher that accepts a 256--bit
+key, and any hash that produces at least a 256--bit output.  However, to make the implementation simpler
+it has been fixed to those choices.
+
+Fortuna is more secure than Yarrow in the sense that attackers who learn parts of the entropy being
+added to the PRNG learn far less about the state than that of Yarrow.  Without getting into to many
+details Fortuna has the ability to recover from state determination attacks where the attacker starts
+to learn information from the PRNGs output about the internal state.  Yarrow on the other hand, cannot
+recover from that problem until new entropy is added to the pool and put to use through the ready() function.
+
+\subsubsection{RC4}
+
+RC4 is an old stream cipher that can also double duty as a PRNG in a pinch.  You key RC4 by
+calling add\_entropy(), and setup the key by calling ready().
+
+You really should not use RC4 for cryptographical purposes, it's broken.
+
+\subsubsection{SOBER-128}
+
+SOBER--128 is a stream cipher designed by the QUALCOMM Australia team.  Like RC4, you key it by
+calling add\_entropy().  There is no need to call ready() for this PRNG as it does not do anything.
+
+Note: this cipher has several oddities about how it operates.  The first call to add\_entropy() sets the cipher's key.
+Every other time call to the add\_entropy() function sets the cipher's IV variable.  The IV mechanism allows you to
+encrypt several messages with the same key, and not re--use the same key material.
+
+Unlike Yarrow and Fortuna, all of the entropy (and hence security) of this algorithm rests in the data
+you pass it on the \textbf{first} call to add\_entropy().  All buffers sent to add\_entropy() must have a length
+that is a multiple of four bytes.
+
+Like RC4, the output of SOBER--128 is XOR'ed against the buffer you provide it.  In this manner, you can use
+sober128\_read() as an encrypt (and decrypt) function.
+
+Since SOBER--128 has a fixed keying scheme, and is very fast (faster than RC4) the ideal usage of SOBER-128 is to
+key it from the output of Fortuna (or Yarrow), and use it to encrypt messages.  It is also ideal for
+simulations which need a high quality (and fast) stream of bytes.
+
+\subsubsection{ChaCha20}
+
+ChaCha20 is a fast stream cipher built on a pseudorandom function designed by Daniel J. Bernstein.
+It can also double duty as a PRNG.
+
+It is recommended to use 40 bytes of truly random bytes for initialization.
+
+The implementation supports adding entropy via the add\_entropy() function while already being operational.
+
+\subsubsection{Example Usage}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   prng_state prng;
+   unsigned char buf[32];
+   int err;
+
+   if ((err = rc4_start(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("RC4 init error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      exit(-1);
+   }
+
+   /* use "key" as the key */
+   if ((err = rc4_add_entropy("key", 3, &prng)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("RC4 add entropy error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      exit(-1);
+   }
+
+   /* setup RC4 for use */
+   if ((err = rc4_ready(&prng)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("RC4 ready error: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      exit(-1);
+   }
+
+   /* encrypt buffer */
+   strcpy(buf,"hello world");
+   if (rc4_read(buf, 11, &prng) != 11) {
+      printf("RC4 read error\n");
+      exit(-1);
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+To decrypt you have to do the exact same steps.
+
+\mysection{The Secure RNG}
+\index{Secure RNG}
+An RNG is related to a PRNG in many ways, except that it does not expand a smaller seed to get the data.  They generate their random bits
+by performing some computation on fresh input bits.  Possibly the hardest thing to get correctly in a cryptosystem is the
+PRNG.  Computers are deterministic that try hard not to stray from pre--determined paths.  This makes gathering entropy needed to seed a PRNG
+a hard task.
+
+There is one small function that may help on certain platforms:
+\index{rng\_get\_bytes()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+unsigned long rng_get_bytes(
+    unsigned char *buf,
+    unsigned long  len,
+    void         (*callback)(void));
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will try one of three methods of getting random data.  The first is to open the popular \textit{/dev/random} device which
+on most *NIX platforms provides cryptographic random bits\footnote{This device is available in Windows through the Cygwin compiler suite.  It emulates \textit{/dev/random} via the Microsoft CSP.}.
+The second method is to try the Microsoft Cryptographic Service Provider, and read the RNG.  The third method is an ANSI C
+clock drift method that is also somewhat popular but gives bits of lower entropy.  The \textit{callback} parameter is a pointer to a function that returns void.  It is
+used when the slower ANSI C RNG must be used so the calling application can still work.  This is useful since the ANSI C RNG has a throughput of roughly three
+bytes a second.  The callback pointer may be set to {\bf NULL} to avoid using it if you do not want to.  The function returns the number of bytes actually read from
+any RNG source.  There is a function to help setup a PRNG as well:
+\index{rng\_make\_prng()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rng_make_prng(       int  bits,
+                         int  wprng,
+                  prng_state *prng,
+                       void (*callback)(void));
+\end{verbatim}
+This will try to initialize the prng with a state of at least \textit{bits} of entropy.  The \textit{callback} parameter works much like
+the callback in \textit{rng\_get\_bytes()}.  It is highly recommended that you use this function to setup your PRNGs unless you have a
+platform where the RNG does not work well.  Example usage of this function is given below:
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   ecc_key mykey;
+   prng_state prng;
+   int err;
+
+   /* register yarrow */
+   if (register_prng(&yarrow_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering Yarrow\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* setup the PRNG */
+   if ((err = rng_make_prng(128, find_prng("yarrow"), &prng, NULL))
+       != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error setting up PRNG, %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* make a 192-bit ECC key */
+   if ((err = ecc_make_key(&prng, find_prng("yarrow"), 24, &mykey))
+       != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error making key: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\subsection{The Secure PRNG Interface}
+\index{sprng\_desc}
+It is possible to access the secure RNG through the PRNG interface, and in turn use it within dependent functions such
+as the PK API.  This simplifies the cryptosystem on platforms where the secure RNG is fast.  The secure PRNG never
+requires to be started, that is you need not call the start, add\_entropy, or ready functions.  For example, consider
+the previous example using this PRNG.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   ecc_key mykey;
+   int err;
+
+   /* register SPRNG */
+   if (register_prng(&sprng_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering SPRNG\n");
+      return -1;
+   }
+
+   /* make a 192-bit ECC key */
+   if ((err = ecc_make_key(NULL, find_prng("sprng"), 24, &mykey))
+       != CRYPT_OK) {
+      printf("Error making key: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+      return -1;
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\chapter{RSA Public Key Cryptography}
+
+\mysection{Introduction}
+RSA wrote the PKCS \#1 specifications which detail RSA Public Key Cryptography.  In the specifications are
+padding algorithms for encryption and signatures.  The standard includes the \textit{v1.5} and \textit{v2.1} algorithms.
+To simplify matters a little the v2.1 encryption and signature padding algorithms are called OAEP and PSS respectively.
+
+\mysection{PKCS \#1 Padding}
+PKCS \#1 v1.5 padding is so simple that both signature and encryption padding are performed by the same function.  Note: the
+signature padding does \textbf{not} include the ASN.1 padding required.  That is performed by the rsa\_sign\_hash\_ex() function
+documented later on in this chapter.
+
+\subsection{PKCS \#1 v1.5 Encoding}
+The following function performs PKCS \#1 v1.5 padding:
+\index{pkcs\_1\_v1\_5\_encode()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pkcs_1_v1_5_encode(
+    const unsigned char *msg,
+          unsigned long  msglen,
+                    int  block_type,
+          unsigned long  modulus_bitlen,
+             prng_state *prng,
+                    int  prng_idx,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will encode the message pointed to by \textit{msg} of length \textit{msglen} octets.  The \textit{block\_type} parameter must be set to
+\textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EME} to perform encryption padding.  It must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EMSA} to perform signature padding.  The \textit{modulus\_bitlen}
+parameter indicates the length of the modulus in bits.  The padded data is stored in \textit{out} with a length of \textit{outlen} octets.  The output will not be
+longer than the modulus which helps allocate the correct output buffer size.
+
+Only encryption padding requires a PRNG.  When performing signature padding the \textit{prng\_idx} parameter may be left to zero as it is not checked for validity.
+
+\subsection{PKCS \#1 v1.5 Decoding}
+The following function performs PKCS \#1 v1.5 de--padding:
+\index{pkcs\_1\_v1\_5\_decode()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int pkcs_1_v1_5_decode(
+    const unsigned char *msg,
+          unsigned long  msglen,
+                    int  block_type,
+          unsigned long  modulus_bitlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+                    int *is_valid);
+\end{verbatim}
+\index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EME} \index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EMSA}
+This will remove the PKCS padding data pointed to by \textit{msg} of length \textit{msglen}.  The decoded data is stored in \textit{out} of length
+\textit{outlen}.  If the padding is valid, a 1 is stored in \textit{is\_valid}, otherwise, a 0 is stored.  The \textit{block\_type} parameter must be set to either
+\textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EME} or \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_EMSA} depending on whether encryption or signature padding is being removed.
+
+\mysection{PKCS \#1 v2.1 Encryption}
+PKCS \#1 RSA Encryption amounts to OAEP padding of the input message followed by the modular exponentiation.  As far as this portion of
+the library is concerned we are only dealing with th OAEP padding of the message.
+
+\subsection{OAEP Encoding}
+
+The following function performs PKCS \#1 v2.1 encryption padding:
+
+\index{pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_1_oaep_encode(
+    const unsigned char *msg,
+          unsigned long  msglen,
+    const unsigned char *lparam,
+          unsigned long  lparamlen,
+          unsigned long  modulus_bitlen,
+             prng_state *prng,
+                    int  prng_idx,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{alltt}
+
+This accepts \textit{msg} as input of length \textit{msglen} which will be OAEP padded.  The \textit{lparam} variable is an additional system specific
+tag that can be applied to the encoding.  This is useful to identify which system encoded the message.  If no variance is desired then
+\textit{lparam} can be set to \textbf{NULL}.
+
+OAEP encoding requires the length of the modulus in bits in order to calculate the size of the output.  This is passed as the parameter
+\textit{modulus\_bitlen}.  \textit{hash\_idx} is the index into the hash descriptor table of the hash desired.  PKCS \#1 allows any hash to be
+used but both the encoder and decoder must use the same hash in order for this to succeed.  The size of hash output affects the maximum
+ sized input message.  \textit{prng\_idx} and \textit{prng} are the random number generator arguments required to randomize the padding process.
+The padded message is stored in \textit{out} along with the length in \textit{outlen}.
+
+If $h$ is the length of the hash and $m$ the length of the modulus (both in octets) then the maximum payload for \textit{msg} is
+$m - 2h - 2$.  For example, with a $1024$--bit RSA key and SHA--1 as the hash the maximum payload is $86$ bytes.
+
+Note that when the message is padded it still has not been RSA encrypted.  You must pass the output of this function to
+rsa\_exptmod() to encrypt it.
+
+\subsection{OAEP Decoding}
+
+\index{pkcs\_1\_oaep\_decode()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_1_oaep_decode(
+    const unsigned char *msg,
+          unsigned long  msglen,
+    const unsigned char *lparam,
+          unsigned long  lparamlen,
+          unsigned long  modulus_bitlen,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+                    int *res);
+\end{alltt}
+
+This function decodes an OAEP encoded message and outputs the original message that was passed to the OAEP encoder.  \textit{msg} is the
+output of pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode() of length \textit{msglen}.  \textit{lparam} is the same system variable passed to the OAEP encoder.  If it does not
+match what was used during encoding this function will not decode the packet.  \textit{modulus\_bitlen} is the size of the RSA modulus in bits
+and must match what was used during encoding.  Similarly the \textit{hash\_idx} index into the hash descriptor table must match what was used
+during encoding.
+
+If the function succeeds it decodes the OAEP encoded message into \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} and stores a
+$1$ in \textit{res}.  If the packet is invalid it stores $0$ in \textit{res} and if the function fails for another reason
+it returns an error code.
+
+\mysection{PKCS \#1 Digital Signatures}
+
+\subsection{PSS Encoding}
+PSS encoding is the second half of the PKCS \#1 standard which is padding to be applied to messages that are signed.
+
+\index{pkcs\_1\_pss\_encode()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_1_pss_encode(
+    const unsigned char *msghash,
+          unsigned long  msghashlen,
+          unsigned long  saltlen,
+             prng_state *prng,
+                    int  prng_idx,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+          unsigned long  modulus_bitlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{alltt}
+
+This function assumes the message to be PSS encoded has previously been hashed.  The input hash \textit{msghash} is of length
+\textit{msghashlen}.  PSS allows a variable length random salt (it can be zero length) to be introduced in the signature process.
+\textit{hash\_idx} is the index into the hash descriptor table of the hash to use.  \textit{prng\_idx} and \textit{prng} are the random
+number generator information required for the salt.
+
+Similar to OAEP encoding \textit{modulus\_bitlen} is the size of the RSA modulus (in bits).  It limits the size of the salt.  If $m$ is the length
+of the modulus $h$ the length of the hash output (in octets) then there can be $m - h - 2$ bytes of salt.
+
+This function does not actually sign the data it merely pads the hash of a message so that it can be processed by rsa\_exptmod().
+
+\subsection{PSS Decoding}
+
+To decode a PSS encoded signature block you have to use the following.
+
+\index{pkcs\_1\_pss\_decode()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_1_pss_decode(
+    const unsigned char *msghash,
+          unsigned long  msghashlen,
+    const unsigned char *sig,
+          unsigned long  siglen,
+          unsigned long  saltlen,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+          unsigned long  modulus_bitlen,
+                    int *res);
+\end{alltt}
+This will decode the PSS encoded message in \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} and compare it to values in \textit{msghash} of length
+\textit{msghashlen}.  If the block is a valid PSS block and the decoded hash equals the hash supplied \textit{res} is set to non--zero.  Otherwise,
+it is set to zero.  The rest of the parameters are as in the PSS encode call.
+
+It's important to use the same \textit{saltlen} and hash for both encoding and decoding as otherwise the procedure will not work.
+
+\mysection{RSA Key Operations}
+\subsection{Background}
+
+RSA is a public key algorithm that is based on the inability to find the \textit{e-th} root modulo a composite of unknown
+factorization.  Normally the difficulty of breaking RSA is associated with the integer factoring problem but they are
+not strictly equivalent.
+
+The system begins with with two primes $p$ and $q$ and their product $N = pq$.  The order or \textit{Euler totient} of the
+multiplicative sub-group formed modulo $N$ is given as $\phi(N) = (p - 1)(q - 1)$ which can be reduced to
+$\mbox{lcm}(p - 1, q - 1)$.  The public key consists of the composite $N$ and some integer $e$ such that
+$\mbox{gcd}(e, \phi(N)) = 1$.  The private key consists of the composite $N$ and the inverse of $e$ modulo $\phi(N)$
+often simply denoted as $de \equiv 1\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }\phi(N))$.
+
+A person who wants to encrypt with your public key simply forms an integer (the plaintext) $M$ such that
+$1 < M < N-2$ and computes the ciphertext $C = M^e\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }N)$.  Since finding the inverse exponent $d$
+given only $N$ and $e$ appears to be intractable only the owner of the private key can decrypt the ciphertext and compute
+$C^d \equiv \left (M^e \right)^d \equiv M^1 \equiv M\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }N)$.  Similarly the owner of the private key
+can sign a message by \textit{decrypting} it.  Others can verify it by \textit{encrypting} it.
+
+Currently RSA is a difficult system to cryptanalyze provided that both primes are large and not close to each other.
+Ideally $e$ should be larger than $100$ to prevent direct analysis.  For example, if $e$ is three and you do not pad
+the plaintext to be encrypted than it is possible that $M^3 < N$ in which case finding the cube-root would be trivial.
+The most often suggested value for $e$ is $65537$ since it is large enough to make such attacks impossible and also well
+designed for fast exponentiation (requires 16 squarings and one multiplication).
+
+It is important to pad the input to RSA since it has particular mathematical structure.  For instance
+$M_1^dM_2^d = (M_1M_2)^d$ which can be used to forge a signature.  Suppose $M_3 = M_1M_2$ is a message you want
+to have a forged signature for.  Simply get the signatures for $M_1$ and $M_2$ on their own and multiply the result
+together.  Similar tricks can be used to deduce plaintexts from ciphertexts.  It is important not only to sign
+the hash of documents only but also to pad the inputs with data to remove such structure.
+
+\subsection{RSA Key Generation}
+
+For RSA routines a single \textit{rsa\_key} structure is used.  To make a new RSA key call:
+\index{rsa\_make\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_make_key(prng_state *prng,
+                        int  wprng,
+                        int  size,
+                       long  e,
+                    rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Where \textit{wprng} is the index into the PRNG descriptor array.  The \textit{size} parameter is the size in bytes of the RSA modulus desired.
+The \textit{e} parameter is the encryption exponent desired, typical values are 3, 17, 257 and 65537.  Stick with 65537 since it is big enough to prevent
+trivial math attacks, and not super slow.  The \textit{key} parameter is where the constructed key is placed.  All keys must be at
+least 128 bytes, and no more than 512 bytes in size (\textit{that is from 1024 to 4096 bits}).
+
+\index{rsa\_free()}
+Note: the \textit{rsa\_make\_key()} function allocates memory at run--time when you make the key.  Make sure to call
+\textit{rsa\_free()} (see below) when you are finished with the key.  If \textit{rsa\_make\_key()} fails it will automatically
+free the memory allocated.
+
+\index{PK\_PRIVATE} \index{PK\_PUBLIC}
+There are two types of RSA keys.  The types are {\bf PK\_PRIVATE} and {\bf PK\_PUBLIC}.  The first type is a private
+RSA key which includes the CRT parameters\footnote{As of v0.99 the PK\_PRIVATE\_OPTIMIZED type has been deprecated, and has been replaced by the
+PK\_PRIVATE type.} in the form of a RSAPrivateKey (PKCS \#1 compliant).  The second type, is a public RSA key which only includes the modulus and public exponent.
+It takes the form of a RSAPublicKey (PKCS \#1 compliant).
+
+\subsection{RSA Exponentiation}
+To do raw work with the RSA function, that is without padding, use the following function:
+\index{rsa\_exptmod()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_exptmod(const unsigned char *in,
+                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                      unsigned char *out,
+                      unsigned long *outlen,
+                                int  which,
+                            rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will load the bignum from \textit{in} as a big endian integer in the format PKCS \#1 specifies, raises it to either \textit{e} or \textit{d} and stores the result
+in \textit{out} and the size of the result in \textit{outlen}. \textit{which} is set to {\bf PK\_PUBLIC} to use \textit{e}
+(i.e. for encryption/verifying) and set to {\bf PK\_PRIVATE} to use \textit{d} as the exponent (i.e. for decrypting/signing).
+
+Note: the output of this function is zero--padded as per PKCS \#1 specification.  This allows this routine to work with PKCS \#1 padding functions properly.
+
+\subsection{RSA Key Size}
+To fetch the key size of an RSA key, use the following function:
+\index{rsa\_get\_size()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_get_size(rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This can be used to determine the modulus size of an RSA key.
+
+\mysection{RSA Key Encryption}
+Normally RSA is used to encrypt short symmetric keys which are then used in block ciphers to encrypt a message.
+To facilitate encrypting short keys the following functions have been provided.
+
+\index{rsa\_encrypt\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_encrypt_key(
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+    const unsigned char *lparam,
+          unsigned long  lparamlen,
+             prng_state *prng,
+                    int  prng_idx,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This function will OAEP pad \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} bytes, RSA encrypt it, and store the ciphertext
+in \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets.  The \textit{lparam} and \textit{lparamlen} are the same parameters you would pass
+to \index{pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode()} pkcs\_1\_oaep\_encode().
+
+\subsection{Extended Encryption}
+As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 PKCS \#1 style paddings in these higher level functions.  The following is the extended
+encryption function:
+
+\index{rsa\_encrypt\_key\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_encrypt_key_ex(
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+    const unsigned char *lparam,
+          unsigned long  lparamlen,
+             prng_state *prng,
+                    int  prng_idx,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+                    int  padding,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_OAEP} \index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5}
+The parameters are all the same as for rsa\_encrypt\_key() except for the addition of the \textit{padding} parameter.  It must be set to
+\textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to perform v1.5 encryption, or set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_OAEP} to perform v2.1 encryption.
+
+When performing v1.5 encryption, the hash and lparam parameters are totally ignored and can be set to \textbf{NULL} or zero (respectively).
+
+\mysection{RSA Key Decryption}
+\index{rsa\_decrypt\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_decrypt_key(
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+    const unsigned char *lparam,
+          unsigned long  lparamlen,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+                    int *stat,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This function will RSA decrypt \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} then OAEP de-pad the resulting data and store it in
+\textit{out} of length \textit{outlen}.  The \textit{lparam} and \textit{lparamlen} are the same parameters you would pass
+to pkcs\_1\_oaep\_decode().
+
+If the RSA decrypted data is not a valid OAEP packet then \textit{stat} is set to $0$.  Otherwise, it is set to $1$.
+
+\subsection{Extended Decryption}
+As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 PKCS \#1 style paddings in these higher level functions.  The following is the extended
+decryption function:
+
+\index{rsa\_decrypt\_key\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_decrypt_key_ex(
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+    const unsigned char *lparam,
+          unsigned long  lparamlen,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+                    int  padding,
+                    int *stat,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Similar to the extended encryption, the new parameter \textit{padding} indicates which version of the PKCS \#1 standard to use.
+It must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to perform v1.5 decryption, or set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_OAEP} to perform v2.1 decryption.
+
+When performing v1.5 decryption, the hash and lparam parameters are totally ignored and can be set to \textbf{NULL} or zero (respectively).
+
+
+\mysection{RSA Signature Generation}
+Similar to RSA key encryption RSA is also used to \textit{digitally sign} message digests (hashes).  To facilitate this
+process the following functions have been provided.
+
+\index{rsa\_sign\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_sign_hash(const unsigned char *in,
+                        unsigned long  inlen,
+                        unsigned char *out,
+                        unsigned long *outlen,
+                           prng_state *prng,
+                                  int  prng_idx,
+                                  int  hash_idx,
+                        unsigned long  saltlen,
+                              rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will PSS encode the message digest pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  Next, the PSS encoded hash will be RSA
+\textit{signed} and the output stored in the buffer pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets.
+
+The \textit{hash\_idx} parameter indicates which hash will be used to create the PSS encoding.  It should be the same as the hash used to
+hash the message being signed.  The \textit{saltlen} parameter indicates the length of the desired salt, and should typically be small.  A good
+default value is between 8 and 16 octets.  Strictly, it must be small than $modulus\_len - hLen - 2$ where \textit{modulus\_len} is the size of
+the RSA modulus (in octets), and \textit{hLen} is the length of the message digest produced by the chosen hash.
+
+\subsection{Extended Signatures}
+
+As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 signatures.  The extended signature generation function has the following prototype:
+
+\index{rsa\_sign\_hash\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_sign_hash_ex(
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen,
+                    int  padding,
+          prng_state    *prng,
+                    int  prng_idx,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+          unsigned long  saltlen,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will PKCS encode the message digest pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  Next, the PKCS encoded hash will be RSA
+\textit{signed} and the output stored in the buffer pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets.  The \textit{padding} parameter
+must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to produce a v1.5 signature, otherwise, it must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_PSS} to produce a
+v2.1 signature.
+
+\index{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5\_NA1}
+As of v1.18.0, the library also supports v1.5 signature generation without ASN.1 encoding the signature which can be indicated by passing
+\textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5\_NA1} as \textit{padding} parameter. This option has been introduced to provide compatibilty to SSL3.0 implementations
+which implemented this.
+
+When generating a standard v1.5 signature the \textit{prng}, and \textit{prng\_idx} parameters are ignored.
+When generating a v1.5 signature without ASN.1 decoding additionally the textit{hash\_idx} parameter is ignored.
+
+\mysection{RSA Signature Verification}
+\index{rsa\_verify\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_verify_hash(const unsigned char *sig,
+                          unsigned long  siglen,
+                    const unsigned char *msghash,
+                          unsigned long  msghashlen,
+                                    int  hash_idx,
+                          unsigned long  saltlen,
+                                    int *stat,
+                                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will RSA \textit{verify} the signature pointed to by \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} octets.  Next, the RSA decoded data is PSS decoded
+and the extracted hash is compared against the message digest pointed to by \textit{msghash} of length \textit{msghashlen} octets.
+
+If the RSA decoded data is not a valid PSS message, or if the PSS decoded hash does not match the \textit{msghash}
+value, \textit{res} is set to $0$.  Otherwise, if the function succeeds, and signature is valid \textit{res} is set to $1$.
+
+\subsection{RSA Signature Salt Length}
+
+The v2.1 signature algorithm requires a salt length to be able to properly
+encode resp. decode. To fetch the maximum possible salt length this function
+is provided:
+
+\index{rsa\_sign\_saltlen\_get\_max()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_sign_saltlen_get_max(int hash_idx, rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+As stated in the PKCS\#1 RFC3447 "Typical salt lengths in octets are hLen
+(the length of the output of the hash function Hash) and 0".
+This function is provided to be able to use other lengths as well and to make
+sure at runtime that the RSA key can handle the desired salt length.
+
+\subsection{Extended Verification}
+
+As of v1.15, the library supports both v1.5 and v2.1 signature verification.  The extended signature verification function has the following prototype:
+
+\index{rsa\_verify\_hash\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_verify_hash_ex(
+    const unsigned char *sig,
+          unsigned long  siglen,
+    const unsigned char *hash,
+          unsigned long  hashlen,
+                    int  padding,
+                    int  hash_idx,
+          unsigned long  saltlen,
+                    int *stat,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will RSA \textit{verify} the signature pointed to by \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} octets.  Next, the RSA decoded data is PKCS decoded
+and the extracted hash is compared against the message digest pointed to by \textit{msghash} of length \textit{msghashlen} octets.
+
+If the RSA decoded data is not a valid PSS message, or if the PKCS decoded hash does not match the \textit{msghash}
+value, \textit{res} is set to $0$.  Otherwise, if the function succeeds, and signature is valid \textit{res} is set to $1$.
+
+The \textit{padding} parameter must be set to \textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5} to perform a v1.5 verification.  Otherwise, it must be set to
+\textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_PSS} to perform a v2.1 verification.
+
+As of v1.18.0, the library also supports v1.5 signature verification without ASN.1 decoding the signature which can be indicated by passing
+\textbf{LTC\_PKCS\_1\_V1\_5\_NA1} as \textit{padding} parameter.
+
+When performing a standard v1.5 verification the \textit{saltlen} parameter is ignored.
+When performing a v1.5 verification without ASN.1 decoding additionally the \textit{hash\_idx} parameter is ignored.
+
+
+\mysection{RSA Encryption Example}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+   int           err, hash_idx, prng_idx, res;
+   unsigned long l1, l2;
+   unsigned char pt[16], pt2[16], out[1024];
+   rsa_key       key;
+
+   /* register prng/hash */
+   if (register_prng(&sprng_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering sprng");
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* register a math library (in this case TomsFastMath)
+   ltc_mp = tfm_desc;
+
+   if (register_hash(&sha1_desc) == -1) {
+      printf("Error registering sha1");
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+   hash_idx = find_hash("sha1");
+   prng_idx = find_prng("sprng");
+
+   /* make an RSA-1024 key */
+   if ((err = rsa_make_key(NULL,     /* PRNG state */
+                           prng_idx, /* PRNG idx */
+                           1024/8,   /* 1024-bit key */
+                           65537,    /* we like e=65537 */
+                           &key)     /* where to store the key */
+       ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+       printf("rsa_make_key %s", error_to_string(err));
+       return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* fill in pt[] with a key we want to send ... */
+   l1 = sizeof(out);
+   if ((err = rsa_encrypt_key(pt, /* data we wish to encrypt */
+                              16, /* data is 16 bytes long */
+                             out, /* where to store ciphertext */
+                             &l1, /* length of ciphertext */
+                       "TestApp", /* our lparam for this program */
+                               7, /* lparam is 7 bytes long */
+                            NULL, /* PRNG state */
+                        prng_idx, /* prng idx */
+                        hash_idx, /* hash idx */
+                            &key) /* our RSA key */
+       ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+       printf("rsa_encrypt_key %s", error_to_string(err));
+       return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+
+   /* now let's decrypt the encrypted key */
+   l2 = sizeof(pt2);
+   if ((err = rsa_decrypt_key(out, /* encrypted data */
+                               l1, /* length of ciphertext */
+                              pt2, /* where to put plaintext */
+                              &l2, /* plaintext length */
+                        "TestApp", /* lparam for this program */
+                                7, /* lparam is 7 bytes long */
+                         hash_idx, /* hash idx */
+                             &res, /* validity of data */
+                             &key) /* our RSA key */
+        ) != CRYPT_OK) {
+       printf("rsa_decrypt_key %s", error_to_string(err));
+       return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   }
+   /* if all went well pt == pt2, l2 == 16, res == 1 */
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\mysection{RSA Key Format}
+
+The RSA key format adopted for exporting and importing keys is the PKCS \#1 format defined by the ASN.1 constructs known as
+RSAPublicKey and RSAPrivateKey.  Additionally, the OpenSSL key format is supported as well.
+
+\subsection{RSA Key Export}
+To export a RSA key use the following function.
+
+\index{rsa\_export()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_export(unsigned char *out,
+               unsigned long *outlen,
+                         int  type,
+                     rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will export the RSA key depending on the value of \textit{type}.
+
+The RSAPublicKey (PKCS \#1 type) format will be used for the public key,
+indicated by \textbf{PK\_PUBLIC}.
+The RSAPrivateKey (PKCS \#1 type) format will be used for the private key,
+indicated by \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE}.
+
+As of v1.18.0 this function can also export OpenSSL-compatible formatted public RSA keys.
+By OR'ing \textbf{PK\_STD} and \textbf{PK\_PUBLIC} the public key will be exported
+in the SubjectPublicKeyInfo (X.509 type) format.
+
+\subsection{RSA Key Import}
+To import a RSA key use one of the following function.
+
+\subsubsection{Import from standard formats}
+
+This will import the key stored in \textit{in} of length inlen and import it to \textit{key}.
+
+These formats are normally distributed in the PEM format, consisting of a label defining the content and base64 encoded DER-serialized data.
+
+All the import functions expect binary DER data.
+
+\index{rsa\_import()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_import(const unsigned char *in,
+                     unsigned long  inlen,
+                           rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can import both RSAPublicKey and RSAPrivateKey formats.
+
+As of v1.06 this function can also import OpenSSL DER formatted public RSA keys.  They are essentially encapsulated RSAPublicKeys.  LibTomCrypt will
+import the key, strip off the additional data and fill in the \textit{rsa\_key} structure.
+
+\index{rsa\_import\_pkcs8()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_import_pkcs8(const unsigned char *in,
+                           unsigned long inlen,
+                              const void *passwd,
+                           unsigned long passwdlen,
+                                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can import RSA private keys serialized in PKCS\#8 format.
+
+It provides a \textit{password} parameter for the encrypted PKCS\#8 format, but this functionality is currently NOT implemented.
+
+\index{rsa\_import\_x509()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_import_x509(const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long inlen,
+                                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can import the RSA public key from a X.509 certificate.
+
+\subsubsection{Import from plain big numbers}
+
+\index{rsa\_set\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_set_key(const unsigned char *N,
+                      unsigned long Nlen,
+                const unsigned char *e,
+                      unsigned long elen,
+                const unsigned char *d,
+                      unsigned long dlen,
+                rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can import the plain RSA key parameters \textit{N}, \textit{e} and \textit{d}.
+The parameter \textit{d} is optional and only required when importing a private key.
+
+\index{rsa\_set\_factors()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_set_factors(const unsigned char *p,
+                          unsigned long plen,
+                    const unsigned char *q,
+                          unsigned long qlen,
+                    rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can import the plain RSA key factors \textit{p} and \textit{q}.
+
+\index{rsa\_set\_crt\_params()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rsa_set_crt_params(const unsigned char *dP,
+                             unsigned long dPlen,
+                       const unsigned char *dQ,
+                             unsigned long dQlen,
+                       const unsigned char *qP,
+                             unsigned long qPlen,
+                       rsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can import the plain RSA CRT (chinese remainder theorem) parameters \textit{dP}, \textit{dQ} and \textit{qP}.
+
+After importing \textit{p}, \textit{q}, \textit{dP}, \textit{dQ} and \textit{qP}
+the library can perfrom the optimized CRT calculations on private key operations.
+
+\chapter{Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange}
+
+\mysection{Background}
+
+Diffie-Hellman was the original public key system proposed.  The system is based upon the group structure
+of finite fields.  For Diffie-Hellman a prime $p$ is chosen and a ``base'' $b$ such that $b^x\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p)$
+generates a large sub-group of prime order (for unique values of $x$).
+
+A secret key is an exponent $x$ and a public key is the value of $y \equiv g^x\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p)$.  The term
+``discrete logarithm'' denotes the action of finding $x$ given only $y$, $g$ and $p$.  The key exchange part of
+Diffie-Hellman arises from the fact that two users A and B with keys $(A_x, A_y)$ and $(B_x, B_y)$ can exchange
+a shared key $K \equiv B_y^{A_x} \equiv A_y^{B_x} \equiv g^{A_xB_x}\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p)$.
+
+From this public encryption and signatures can be developed.  The trivial way to encrypt (for example) using a public key
+$y$ is to perform the key exchange offline.  The sender invents a key $k$ and its public copy
+$k' \equiv g^k\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p)$ and uses $K \equiv k'^{A_x}\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p)$ as a key to encrypt
+the message with.  Typically $K$ would be sent to a one-way hash and the message digested used as a key in a
+symmetric cipher.
+
+It is important that the order of the sub-group that $g$ generates not only be large but also prime.  There are
+discrete logarithm algorithms that take $\sqrt r$ time given the order $r$.  The discrete logarithm can be computed
+modulo each prime factor of $r$ and the results combined using the Chinese Remainder Theorem.  In the cases where
+$r$ is ``B-Smooth'' (e.g. all small factors or powers of small prime factors) the solution is trivial to find.
+
+To thwart such attacks the primes and bases in the library have been designed and fixed.  Given a prime $p$ the order of
+ the sub-group generated is a large prime namely ${p - 1} \over 2$.  Such primes are known as ``strong primes'' and the
+smaller prime (e.g. the order of the base) are known as Sophie-Germaine primes.
+
+\mysection{Core Functions}
+
+This library also provides core Diffie-Hellman functions so you can negotiate keys over insecure mediums.  The routines
+provided are relatively easy to use and only take two function calls to negotiate a shared key.  There is a structure
+called ``dh\_key'' which stores the Diffie-Hellman key in a format these routines can use.  The first set of routines
+are to make a Diffie-Hellman private key pair:
+\index{dh\_make\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_set_pg_groupsize(int groupsize, dh_key *key);
+int dh_generate_key(prng_state *prng, int wprng, dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+The ``groupsize'' is the size of the modulus you want in bytes.  Currently support sizes are 96 to 1024 bytes which correspond
+to key sizes of 768 to 8192 bits. The smaller the key the faster it is to use however it will be less secure.  When
+specifying a size not explicitly supported by the library it will round {\em up} to the next key size.  If the size is
+above 512 it will return an error.  So if you pass ``groupsize == 32'' it will use a 768 bit key but if you pass
+``groupsize == 20000'' it will return an error.  The primes and generators used are built-into the library and were designed
+to meet very specific goals.  The primes are strong primes which means that if $p$ is the prime then
+$p-1$ is equal to $2r$ where $r$ is a large prime.  The bases are chosen to generate a group of order $r$ to prevent
+leaking a bit of the key.  This means the bases generate a very large prime order group which is good to make cryptanalysis
+hard.
+
+The next two routines are for exporting/importing Diffie-Hellman keys in/from DER encoded ASN.1.  This is useful for transport
+over communication mediums.
+
+\index{dh\_export()} \index{dh\_import()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_export(unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen,
+              int type, dh_key *key);
+
+int dh_import(const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The ASN.1 sequence used to represent a DH key is as following:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+DiffieHellmanKey ::= SEQUENCE {
+      version Version,
+      flags   Flags,
+      p       INTEGER, -- prime
+      g       INTEGER, -- base/group
+      n       INTEGER  -- either x when private key or y when public key }
+
+Version  ::=  INTEGER  {  v1(0)  }
+
+Flags    ::=  BIT STRING {
+      privateKey      (0) -- this BIT is '1' if it's a private key
+                          --          or '0' if it's a public key
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These two functions work just like the ``rsa\_export()'' and ``rsa\_import()'' functions except these work with
+Diffie-Hellman keys. Its important to note you do not have to free the ram for a ``dh\_key'' if an import fails.
+
+You can free a ``dh\_key'' using:
+\begin{verbatim}
+void dh_free(dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+After you have exported a copy of your public key (using {\bf PK\_PUBLIC} as ``type'') you can now create a shared secret
+with the other user using:
+\index{dh\_shared\_secret()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_shared_secret(dh_key *private_key,
+                     dh_key *public_key,
+                     unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Where ``private\_key'' is the key you made and ``public\_key'' is the copy of the public key the other user sent you.  The result goes
+into ``out'' and the length into ``outlen''.  If all went correctly the data in ``out'' should be identical for both parties.  It is important to
+note that the two keys have to be the same size in order for this to work.  There is a function to get the size of a
+key:
+\index{dh\_get\_groupsize()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_get_groupsize(dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This returns the size in bytes of the modulus chosen for that key.
+
+\mysection{Other Diffie-Hellman Functions}
+
+To be able to import Diffie-Hellman keys LibTomCrypt provides several API functions.
+\\
+
+To import the prime and group from binary format:
+\index{dh\_set\_pg()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_set_pg(const unsigned char *p, unsigned long plen,
+              const unsigned char *g, unsigned long glen,
+              dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This sets the prime \textit{p} of length \textit{plen} and the generator/base \textit{g} of length \textit{glen} in the DH key \textit{key}.
+\\
+
+To import the prime and group from an ASN.1 encoded DHparam Sequence:
+\index{dh\_set\_pg\_dhparam()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_set_pg_dhparam(const unsigned char *dhparam, unsigned long dhparamlen, dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This sets the parameters in \textit{dhparam} of \textit{dhparamlen} in the DH key \textit{key}.
+\\
+
+To import a private or public key from binary data:
+\index{dh\_set\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dh_set_key(const unsigned char *in, unsigned long inlen, int type, dh_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will import, depending on \textit{type} which can be either \textit{PK\_PRIVATE} or \textit{PK\_PUBLIC},
+the according part of the DH key \textit{key} from \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}.
+After import the key will be verified and in case of an error it will be free'd.
+
+\mysection{Remarks on Usage}
+Its important that you hash the shared key before trying to use it as a key for a symmetric cipher or something.  An
+example program that communicates over sockets, using MD5 and 1024-bit DH keys is\footnote{This function is a small example.  It is suggested that proper packaging be used.  For example, if the public key sent is truncated these routines will not detect that.}:
+\newpage
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int establish_secure_socket(int sock, int mode, unsigned char *key,
+                            prng_state *prng, int wprng)
+{
+   unsigned char buf[4096], buf2[4096];
+   unsigned long x, len;
+   int res, err, inlen;
+   dh_key mykey, theirkey;
+
+   /* make up our private key */
+   if ((err = dh_set_pg_groupsize(128, &mykey)) != CRYPT_OK)  {
+      return err;
+   }
+   if ((err = dh_generate_key(prng, wprng, &mykey)) != CRYPT_OK)  {
+      return err;
+   }
+
+   /* export our key as public */
+   x = sizeof(buf);
+   if ((err = dh_export(buf, &x, PK_PUBLIC, &mykey)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      res = err;
+      goto done2;
+   }
+
+   if (mode == 0) {
+      /* mode 0 so we send first */
+      if (send(sock, buf, x, 0) != x) {
+         res = CRYPT_ERROR;
+         goto done2;
+      }
+
+      /* get their key */
+      if ((inlen = recv(sock, buf2, sizeof(buf2), 0)) <= 0) {
+         res = CRYPT_ERROR;
+         goto done2;
+      }
+   } else {
+      /* mode >0 so we send second */
+      if ((inlen = recv(sock, buf2, sizeof(buf2), 0)) <= 0) {
+         res = CRYPT_ERROR;
+         goto done2;
+      }
+
+      if (send(sock, buf, x, 0) != x) {
+         res = CRYPT_ERROR;
+         goto done2;
+      }
+   }
+
+   if ((err = dh_import(buf2, inlen, &theirkey)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      res = err;
+      goto done2;
+   }
+
+   /* make shared secret */
+   x = sizeof(buf);
+   if ((err = dh_shared_secret(&mykey, &theirkey, buf, &x)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      res = err;
+      goto done;
+   }
+
+   /* hash it */
+   len = 16;        /* default is MD5 so "key" must be at least 16 bytes long */
+   if ((err = hash_memory(find_hash("md5"), buf, x, key, &len)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      res = err;
+      goto done;
+   }
+
+   /* clean up and return */
+   res = CRYPT_OK;
+done:
+   dh_free(&theirkey);
+done2:
+   dh_free(&mykey);
+   zeromem(buf,  sizeof(buf));
+   zeromem(buf2, sizeof(buf2));
+   return res;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+\subsection{Remarks on The Snippet}
+When the above code snippet is done (assuming all went well) there will be a shared 128-bit key in the ``key'' array
+passed to ``establish\_secure\_socket()''.
+
+\chapter{Elliptic Curve Cryptography}
+
+\mysection{Background}
+The library provides a set of core ECC functions as well that are designed to be the Elliptic Curve analogy of all of the
+Diffie-Hellman routines in the previous chapter.  Elliptic curves (of certain forms) have the benefit that they are harder
+to attack (no sub-exponential attacks exist unlike normal DH crypto) in fact the fastest attack requires the square root
+of the order of the base point in time.  That means if you use a base point of order $2^{192}$ (which would represent a
+192-bit key) then the work factor is $2^{96}$ in order to find the secret key.
+
+The curves in this library are taken from the following website:
+\begin{verbatim}
+http://csrc.nist.gov/cryptval/dss.htm
+\end{verbatim}
+
+As of v1.15 three new curves from the SECG standards are also included they are the secp112r1, secp128r1, and secp160r1 curves.  These curves were added to
+support smaller devices which do not need as large keys for security.
+
+They are all curves over the integers modulo a prime.  The curves have the basic equation that is:
+\begin{equation}
+y^2 = x^3 - 3x + b\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod }p)
+\end{equation}
+
+The variable $b$ is chosen such that the number of points is nearly maximal.  In fact the order of the base points $\beta$
+provided are very close to $p$ that is $\vert \vert \phi(\beta) \vert \vert \approx \vert \vert p \vert \vert$.  The curves
+range in order from $\approx 2^{112}$ points to $\approx 2^{521}$.  According to the source document any key size greater
+than or equal to 256-bits is sufficient for long term security.
+
+\mysection{Fixed Point Optimizations}
+\index{Fixed Point ECC}
+\index{MECC\_FP}
+As of v1.12 of LibTomCrypt, support for Fixed Point ECC point multiplication has been added.  It is a generic optimization that is
+supported by any conforming math plugin.  It is enabled by defining \textbf{MECC\_FP} during the build, such as
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC -DMECC_FP" make
+\end{verbatim}
+
+which will build LTC using the TFM math library and enabling this new feature.  The feature is not enabled by default as it is \textbf{NOT} thread
+safe (by default).  It supports the LTC locking macros (such as by enabling LTC\_PTHREAD), but by default is not locked.
+
+\index{FP\_ENTRIES}
+The optimization works by using a Fixed Point multiplier on any base point you use twice or more in a short period of time.  It has a limited size
+cache (of FP\_ENTRIES entries) which it uses to hold recent bases passed to ltc\_ecc\_mulmod().  Any base detected to be used twice is sent through the
+pre--computation phase, and then the fixed point algorithm can be used.  For example, if you use a NIST base point twice in a row, the 2$^{nd}$ and
+all subsequent point multiplications with that point will use the faster algorithm.
+
+\index{FP\_LUT}
+The optimization uses a window on the multiplicand of FP\_LUT bits (default: 8, min: 2, max: 12), and this controls the memory/time trade-off. The larger the
+value the faster the algorithm will be but the more memory it will take.  The memory usage is $3 \cdot 2^{FP\_LUT}$ integers which by default
+with TFM amounts to about 400kB of memory.  Tuning TFM (by changing FP\_SIZE) can decrease the usage by a fair amount.  Memory is only used by a cache entry
+if it is active.  Both FP\_ENTRIES and FP\_LUT are definable on the command line if you wish to override them. For instance,
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC -DMECC_FP -DFP_ENTRIES=8 -DFP_LUT=6" make
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{flushleft}
+\index{FP\_SIZE} \index{TFM} \index{tfm.h}
+would define a window of 6 bits and limit the cache to 8 entries.  Generally, it is better to first tune TFM by adjusting FP\_SIZE (from tfm.h).  It defaults
+to 4096 bits (512 bytes) which is way more than what is required by ECC.  At most, you need 1152 bits to accommodate ECC--521.  If you're only using (say)
+ECC--256 you will only need 576 bits, which would reduce the memory usage by 700\%.
+\end{flushleft}
+
+\mysection{Key Format}
+LibTomCrypt uses a unique format for ECC public and private keys.  While ANSI X9.63 partially specifies key formats, it does it in a less than ideally simple manner.  \
+In the case of LibTomCrypt, it is meant \textbf{solely} for NIST and SECG $GF(p)$ curves.  The format of the keys is as follows:
+
+\index{ECC Key Format}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+ECCPublicKey ::= SEQUENCE {
+    flags       BIT STRING(0), -- public/private flag (always zero),
+    keySize     INTEGER,       -- Curve size (in bits) divided by eight
+                               -- and rounded down, e.g. 521 => 65
+    pubkey.x    INTEGER,       -- The X co-ordinate of the public key point
+    pubkey.y    INTEGER,       -- The Y co-ordinate of the public key point
+}
+
+ECCPrivateKey ::= SEQUENCE {
+    flags       BIT STRING(1), -- public/private flag (always one),
+    keySize     INTEGER,       -- Curve size (in bits) divided by eight
+                               -- and rounded down, e.g. 521 => 65
+    pubkey.x    INTEGER,       -- The X co-ordinate of the public key point
+    pubkey.y    INTEGER,       -- The Y co-ordinate of the public key point
+    secret.k    INTEGER,       -- The secret key scalar
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+The first flags bit denotes whether the key is public (zero) or private (one).
+
+\vfil
+
+\mysection{ECC Curve Parameters}
+The library uses the following structure to describe an elliptic curve.  This is used internally, as well as by the new
+extended ECC functions which allow the user to specify their own curves.
+
+\index{ltc\_ecc\_set\_type}
+\begin{verbatim}
+/** Structure defines a NIST GF(p) curve */
+typedef struct {
+   /** The size of the curve in octets */
+   int size;
+
+   /** name of curve */
+   char *name;
+
+   /** The prime that defines the field (encoded in hex) */
+   char *prime;
+
+   /** The fields B param (hex) */
+   char *B;
+
+   /** The order of the curve (hex) */
+   char *order;
+
+   /** The x co-ordinate of the base point on the curve (hex) */
+   char *Gx;
+
+   /** The y co-ordinate of the base point on the curve (hex) */
+   char *Gy;
+} ltc_ecc_set_type;
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The curve must be of the form $y^2 = x^3 - 3x + b$, and all of the integer parameters are encoded in hexadecimal format.
+
+\mysection{Core Functions}
+\subsection{ECC Key Generation}
+There is a key structure called \textit{ecc\_key} used by the ECC functions.  There is a function to make a key:
+\index{ecc\_make\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_make_key(prng_state *prng,
+                        int  wprng,
+                        int  keysize,
+                    ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \textit{keysize} is the size of the modulus in bytes desired.  Currently directly supported values are 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 48, and 65 bytes which
+correspond to key sizes of 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 384, and 521 bits respectively.  If you pass a key size that is between any key size it will round
+the keysize up to the next available one.
+
+The function will free any internally allocated resources if there is an error.
+
+\subsection{Extended Key Generation}
+As of v1.16, the library supports an extended key generation routine which allows the user to specify their own curve.  It is specified as follows:
+
+\index{ecc\_make\_key\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int  ecc_make_key_ex(
+                 prng_state *prng,
+                        int  wprng,
+                    ecc_key *key,
+     const ltc_ecc_set_type *dp);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function generates a random ECC key over the curve specified by the parameters by \textit{dp}.  The rest of the parameters are equivalent to
+those from the original key generation function.
+
+\subsection{ECC Key Free}
+To free the memory allocated by a ecc\_make\_key(), ecc\_make\_key\_ex(), ecc\_import(), or ecc\_import\_ex() call use the following function:
+\index{ecc\_free()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void ecc_free(ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{ECC Key Export}
+To export an ECC key using the LibTomCrypt format call the following function:
+\index{ecc\_export()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_export(unsigned char *out,
+               unsigned long *outlen,
+                         int  type,
+                     ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will export the key with the given \textit{type} (\textbf{PK\_PUBLIC} or \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE}), and store it to \textit{out}.
+
+\subsection{ECC Key Import}
+The following function imports a LibTomCrypt format ECC key:
+\index{ecc\_import()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_import(const unsigned char *in,
+                     unsigned long  inlen,
+                           ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will import the ECC key from \textit{in}, and store it in the ecc\_key structure pointed to by \textit{key}.  If the operation fails it will free
+any allocated memory automatically.
+
+\subsection{Extended Key Import}
+
+The following function imports a LibTomCrypt format ECC key using a specified set of curve parameters:
+\index{ecc\_import\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int  ecc_import_ex(const unsigned char *in,
+                         unsigned long  inlen,
+                               ecc_key *key,
+                const ltc_ecc_set_type *dp);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will import the key from the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  The key is stored in
+the ECC structure pointed to by \textit{key}.  The curve is specified by the parameters pointed to by \textit{dp}.  The function will free
+all internally allocated memory upon error.
+
+\subsection{ANSI X9.63 Export}
+The following function exports an ECC public key in the ANSI X9.63 format:
+
+\index{ecc\_ansi\_x963\_export()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_ansi_x963_export(      ecc_key *key,
+                         unsigned char *out,
+                         unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+The ECC key pointed to by \textit{key} is exported in public fashion to the array pointed to by \textit{out}.  The ANSI X9.63 format used is from
+section 4.3.6 of the standard.  It does not allow for the export of private keys.
+
+\subsection{ANSI X9.63 Import}
+The following function imports an ANSI X9.63 section 4.3.6 format public ECC key:
+
+\index{ecc\_ansi\_x963\_import()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_ansi_x963_import(const unsigned char *in,
+                               unsigned long  inlen,
+                                     ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will import the key stored in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  The imported key is stored in the ECC key pointed to by
+\textit{key}.  The function will free any allocated memory upon error.
+
+\subsection{Extended ANSI X9.63 Import}
+The following function allows the importing of an ANSI x9.63 section 4.3.6 format public ECC key using user specified domain parameters:
+
+\index{ecc\_ansi\_x963\_import\_ex()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_ansi_x963_import_ex(const unsigned char *in,
+                                  unsigned long  inlen,
+                                        ecc_key *key,
+                               ltc_ecc_set_type *dp);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will import the key stored in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets using the domain parameters pointed to by \textit{dp}.
+The imported key is stored in the ECC key pointed to by \textit{key}.  The function will free any allocated memory upon error.
+
+\subsection{ECC Shared Secret}
+To construct a Diffie-Hellman shared secret with a private and public ECC key, use the following function:
+\index{ecc\_shared\_secret()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_shared_secret(      ecc_key *private_key,
+                            ecc_key *public_key,
+                      unsigned char *out,
+                      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+The \textit{private\_key} is typically the local private key, and \textit{public\_key} is the key the remote party has shared.
+Note: this function stores only the $x$ co-ordinate of the shared elliptic point as described in ANSI X9.63 ECC--DH.
+
+\mysection{ECC Diffie-Hellman Encryption}
+ECC--DH Encryption is performed by producing a random key, hashing it, and XOR'ing the digest against the plaintext.  It is not strictly ANSI X9.63 compliant
+but it is very similar.  It has been extended by using an ASN.1 sequence and hash object identifiers to allow portable usage.  The following function
+encrypts a short string (no longer than the message digest) using this technique:
+
+\subsection{ECC-DH Encryption}
+\index{ecc\_encrypt\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_encrypt_key(const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                          unsigned char *out,
+                          unsigned long *outlen,
+                             prng_state *prng,
+                                    int  wprng,
+                                    int  hash,
+                                ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+As the name implies this function encrypts a (symmetric) key, and is not intended for encrypting long messages directly.  It will encrypt the
+plaintext in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  It uses the public ECC key pointed to by \textit{key}, and
+hash algorithm indexed by \textit{hash} to construct a shared secret which may be XOR'ed against the plaintext.  The ciphertext is stored in
+the output buffer pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets.
+
+The data is encrypted to the public ECC \textit{key} such that only the holder of the private key can decrypt the payload.  To have multiple
+recipients multiple call to this function for each public ECC key is required.
+
+\subsection{ECC-DH Decryption}
+\index{ecc\_decrypt\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_decrypt_key(const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                          unsigned char *out,
+                          unsigned long *outlen,
+                                ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function will decrypt an encrypted payload.  The \textit{key} provided must be the private key corresponding to the public key
+used during encryption.  If the wrong key is provided the function will not specifically return an error code.  It is important
+to use some form of challenge response in that case (e.g. compute a MAC of a known string).
+
+\subsection{ECC Encryption Format}
+The packet format for the encrypted keys is the following ASN.1 SEQUENCE:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ECCEncrypt ::= SEQUENCE {
+   hashID        OBJECT IDENTIFIER, -- OID of hash used
+   pubkey        OCTET STRING     , -- Encapsulated ECCPublicKey
+   skey          OCTET STRING       -- xor of plaintext and
+                                    --"hash of shared secret"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{EC DSA Signatures}
+
+There are also functions to sign and verify messages.  They use the ANSI X9.62 EC-DSA algorithm to generate and verify signatures in the
+ANSI X9.62 format.
+
+\subsection{EC-DSA Signature Generation}
+To sign a message digest (hash) use the following function:
+
+\index{ecc\_sign\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_sign_hash(const unsigned char *in,
+                        unsigned long  inlen,
+                        unsigned char *out,
+                        unsigned long *outlen,
+                           prng_state *prng,
+                                  int  wprng,
+                              ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function will EC--DSA sign the message digest stored in the array pointed to by \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  The signature
+will be stored in the array pointed to by \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} octets.  The function requires a properly seeded PRNG, and
+the ECC \textit{key} provided must be a private key.
+
+\index{ecc\_sign\_hash\_rfc7518()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_sign_hash_rfc7518(const unsigned char *in,
+                                unsigned long  inlen,
+                                unsigned char *out,
+                                unsigned long *outlen,
+                                   prng_state *prng,
+                                          int  wprng,
+                                      ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function creates the same EC--DSA signature as \textit{ecc\_sign\_hash} only the output format is different.
+The format follows \url{https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7518#section-3.4}, sometimes it is also called plain signature.
+
+\subsection{EC-DSA Signature Verification}
+\index{ecc\_verify\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_verify_hash(const unsigned char *sig,
+                          unsigned long  siglen,
+                    const unsigned char *hash,
+                          unsigned long  hashlen,
+                                    int *stat,
+                                ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function will verify the EC-DSA signature in the array pointed to by \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen} octets, against the message digest
+pointed to by the array \textit{hash} of length \textit{hashlen}.  It will store a non--zero value in \textit{stat} if the signature is valid.  Note:
+the function will not return an error if the signature is invalid.  It will return an error, if the actual signature payload is an invalid format.
+The ECC \textit{key} must be the public (or private) ECC key corresponding to the key that performed the signature.
+The function \textit{ecc\_verify\_hash} implements signature format according to X9.62 EC--DSA, and the output is compliant for GF(p) curves.
+
+\index{ecc\_verify\_hash\_rfc7518()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int ecc_verify_hash_rfc7518(const unsigned char *sig,
+                                  unsigned long  siglen,
+                            const unsigned char *hash,
+                                  unsigned long  hashlen,
+                                            int *stat,
+                                        ecc_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function validate the EC--DSA signature as \textit{ecc\_verify\_hash} only the signature input format
+follows \url{https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7518#section-3.4}.
+
+\mysection{ECC Keysizes}
+With ECC if you try to sign a hash that is bigger than your ECC key you can run into problems.  The math will still work, and in effect the signature will still
+work.  With ECC keys the strength of the signature is limited by the size of the hash, or the size of they key, whichever is smaller.  For example, if you sign with
+SHA256 and an ECC-192 key, you in effect have 96--bits of security.
+
+The library will not warn you if you make this mistake, so it is important to check yourself before using the signatures.
+
+\chapter{Digital Signature Algorithm}
+\mysection{Introduction}
+The Digital Signature Algorithm (or DSA) is a variant of the ElGamal Signature scheme which has been modified to
+reduce the bandwidth of the signatures.  For example, to have \textit{80-bits of security} with ElGamal, you need a group with an order of at least 1024--bits.
+With DSA, you need a group of order at least 160--bits.  By comparison, the ElGamal signature would require at least 256 bytes of storage, whereas the DSA signature
+would require only at least 40 bytes.
+
+\mysection{Key Format}
+Since no useful public standard for DSA key storage was presented to me during the course of this development I made my own ASN.1 SEQUENCE which I document
+now so that others can interoperate with this library.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+DSAPublicKey ::= SEQUENCE {
+    publicFlags    BIT STRING(0), -- must be 0
+    g              INTEGER      , -- base generator
+                                  -- check that g^q mod p == 1
+                                  -- and that 1 < g < p - 1
+    p              INTEGER      , -- prime modulus
+    q              INTEGER      , -- order of sub-group
+                                  -- (must be prime)
+    y              INTEGER      , -- public key, specifically,
+                                  -- g^x mod p,
+                                  -- check that y^q mod p == 1
+                                  -- and that 1 < y < p - 1
+}
+
+DSAPrivateKey ::= SEQUENCE {
+    publicFlags    BIT STRING(1), -- must be 1
+    g              INTEGER      , -- base generator
+                                  -- check that g^q mod p == 1
+                                  -- and that 1 < g < p - 1
+    p              INTEGER      , -- prime modulus
+    q              INTEGER      , -- order of sub-group
+                                  -- (must be prime)
+    y              INTEGER      , -- public key, specifically,
+                                  -- g^x mod p,
+                                  -- check that y^q mod p == 1
+                                  -- and that 1 < y < p - 1
+    x              INTEGER        -- private key
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The leading BIT STRING has a single bit in it which is zero for public keys and one for private keys.  This makes the structure uniquely decodable,
+and easy to work with.
+
+\mysection{Key Generation}
+To make a DSA key you must call the following function
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_make_key(prng_state *prng,
+                        int  wprng,
+                        int  group_size,
+                        int  modulus_size,
+                    dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+The variable \textit{prng} is an active PRNG state and \textit{wprng} the index to the descriptor.  \textit{group\_size} and
+\textit{modulus\_size} control the difficulty of forging a signature.  Both parameters are in bytes.  The larger the
+\textit{group\_size} the more difficult a forgery becomes upto a limit.  The value of $group\_size$ is limited by
+$15 < group\_size < 1024$ and $modulus\_size - group\_size < 512$.  Suggested values for the pairs are as follows.
+
+\begin{figure}[H]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+\hline \textbf{Bits of Security} & \textbf{group\_size} & \textbf{modulus\_size} \\
+\hline 80  & 20 & 128 \\
+\hline 120 & 30 & 256 \\
+\hline 140 & 35 & 384 \\
+\hline 160 & 40 & 512 \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\caption{DSA Key Sizes}
+\end{figure}
+
+When you are finished with a DSA key you can call the following function to free the memory used.
+\index{dsa\_free()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void dsa_free(dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{Key Verification}
+Each DSA key is composed of the following variables.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+  \item $q$ a small prime of magnitude $256^{group\_size}$.
+  \item $p = qr + 1$ a large prime of magnitude $256^{modulus\_size}$ where $r$ is a random even integer.
+  \item $g = h^r \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ a generator of order $q$ modulo $p$.  $h$ can be any non-trivial random
+        value.  For this library they start at $h = 2$ and step until $g$ is not $1$.
+  \item $x$ a random secret (the secret key) in the range $1 < x < q$
+  \item $y = g^x \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$ the public key.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+A DSA key is considered valid if it passes all of the following tests.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item $q$ must be prime.
+   \item $p$ must be prime.
+   \item $g$ cannot be one of $\lbrace -1, 0, 1 \rbrace$ (modulo $p$).
+   \item $g$ must be less than $p$.
+   \item $(p-1) \equiv 0 \mbox{ (mod }q\mbox{)}$.
+   \item $g^q \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$.
+   \item $1 < y < p - 1$
+   \item $y^q \equiv 1 \mbox{ (mod }p\mbox{)}$.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+Tests one and two ensure that the values will at least form a field which is required for the signatures to
+function.  Tests three and four ensure that the generator $g$ is not set to a trivial value which would make signature
+forgery easier.  Test five ensures that $q$ divides the order of multiplicative sub-group of $\Z/p\Z$. Test six
+ensures that the generator actually generates a prime order group.  Tests seven and eight ensure that the public key
+is within range and belongs to a group of prime order.  Note that test eight does not prove that $g$ generated $y$ only
+that $y$ belongs to a multiplicative sub-group of order $q$.
+
+The following function will perform these tests.
+
+\index{dsa\_verify\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_verify_key(dsa_key *key, int *stat);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will test \textit{key} and store the result in \textit{stat}.  If the result is $stat = 0$ the DSA key failed one of the tests
+and should not be used at all.  If the result is $stat = 1$ the DSA key is valid (as far as valid mathematics are concerned).
+
+\mysection{Signatures}
+\subsection{Signature Generation}
+To generate a DSA signature call the following function:
+
+\index{dsa\_sign\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_sign_hash(const unsigned char *in,
+                        unsigned long  inlen,
+                        unsigned char *out,
+                        unsigned long *outlen,
+                           prng_state *prng,
+                                  int  wprng,
+                              dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Which will sign the data in \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} bytes.  The signature is stored in \textit{out} and the size
+of the signature in \textit{outlen}.  If the signature is longer than the size you initially specify in \textit{outlen} nothing
+is stored and the function returns an error code.  The DSA \textit{key} must be of the \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE} persuasion.
+
+\subsection{Signature Verification}
+To verify a hash created with that function use the following function:
+
+\index{dsa\_verify\_hash()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_verify_hash(const unsigned char *sig,
+                          unsigned long  siglen,
+                    const unsigned char *hash,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                                    int *stat,
+                                dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+Which will verify the data in \textit{hash} of length \textit{inlen} against the signature stored in \textit{sig} of length \textit{siglen}.
+It will set \textit{stat} to $1$ if the signature is valid, otherwise it sets \textit{stat} to $0$.
+
+\mysection{DSA Encrypt and Decrypt}
+As of version 1.07, the DSA keys can be used to encrypt and decrypt small payloads.  It works similar to the ECC encryption where
+a shared key is computed, and the hash of the shared key XOR'ed against the plaintext forms the ciphertext.  The format used is functional port of
+the ECC encryption format to the DSA algorithm.
+
+\subsection{DSA Encryption}
+This function will encrypt a small payload with a recipients public DSA key.
+
+\index{dsa\_encrypt\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_encrypt_key(const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                          unsigned char *out,
+                          unsigned long *outlen,
+                             prng_state *prng,
+                                    int  wprng,
+                                    int  hash,
+                                dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will encrypt the payload in \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} and store the ciphertext in the output buffer \textit{out}.  The
+length of the ciphertext \textit{outlen} must be originally set to the length of the output buffer.  The DSA \textit{key} can be
+a public key.
+
+\subsection{DSA Decryption}
+
+\index{dsa\_decrypt\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_decrypt_key(const unsigned char *in,
+                          unsigned long  inlen,
+                          unsigned char *out,
+                          unsigned long *outlen,
+                                dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will decrypt the ciphertext \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}, and store the original payload in \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen}.
+The DSA \textit{key} must be a private key.
+
+\mysection{DSA Key Import and Export}
+
+\subsection{DSA Key Export}
+To export a DSA key so that it can be transported use the following function:
+\index{dsa\_export()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_export(unsigned char *out,
+               unsigned long *outlen,
+                         int  type,
+                     dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+This will export the DSA \textit{key} to the buffer \textit{out} and set the length in \textit{outlen} (which must have been previously
+initialized to the maximum buffer size).  The \textit{type} variable may be either \textbf{PK\_PRIVATE} or \textbf{PK\_PUBLIC}
+depending on whether you want to export a private or public copy of the DSA key.
+
+\subsection{DSA Key Import}
+To import an exported DSA key use the following function
+:
+\index{dsa\_import()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_import(const unsigned char *in,
+                     unsigned long  inlen,
+                           dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will import the DSA key from the buffer \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} to the \textit{key}.  If the process fails the function
+will automatically free all of the heap allocated in the process (you don't have to call dsa\_free()).
+
+\mysection{Other DSA Functions}
+
+The following functions allow to create a DSA key in 2 steps:
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item Load or generate \textit{p}, \textit{q}, \textit{g} part of the key via \textit{dsa\_set\_pqg()}, \textit{dsa\_set\_pqg\_dsaparam()} or \textit{dsa\_generate\_pqg()}.
+    \item Load or generate the actual DSA key -- private (\textit{x} and \textit{y} values) or public (\textit{y} value).
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\index{dsa\_set\_pqg()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_set_pqg(const unsigned char *p,  unsigned long plen,
+                const unsigned char *q,  unsigned long qlen,
+                const unsigned char *g,  unsigned long glen,
+                dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialise the \textit{p}, \textit{q} and \textit{g} part of \textit{key} structure by directly loading binary
+representation of \textit{p} (with length of \textit{plen}), \textit{q} (with length of \textit{qlen}) and \textit{g} (with length of \textit{glen}).
+A simple DSA key validity check (without primality testing) is performed at the end of this function.
+
+\index{dsa\_set\_pqg\_dsaparam()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_set_pqg_dsaparam(const unsigned char *dsaparam,
+                               unsigned long  dsaparamlen,
+                                     dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialise the \textit{p}, \textit{q} and \textit{g} part of \textit{key} structure by directly loading binary representation
+of DSA parameters stored as a binary data in a buffer \textit{dsaparam} (with length of \textit{dsaparamlen}). A simple DSA key validity
+check (without primality testing) is performed at the end of this function. The \textit{dsaparam} can be generated via:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ openssl dsaparam 2048 -outform DER -out dsaparam.der
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\index{dsa\_generate\_pqg()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_generate_pqg(prng_state *prng,
+                            int  wprng,
+                            int  group_size,
+                            int  modulus_size,
+                        dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will initialise the \textit{p}, \textit{q} and \textit{g} part of \textit{key} structure with newly generated random values.
+As for the parameters they are the same as by \textit{dsa\_make\_key}.
+
+\index{dsa\_set\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_set_key(const unsigned char *in,
+                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                                int  type,
+                            dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function can be used for setting the actual DSA key. If \textit{type} is \textit{PK\_PRIVATE} then the buffer \textit{in}
+(with length of \textit{inlen}) contains a binary representation of \textit{x} part of the key (the public part \textit{y} is computed).
+If \textit{type} is \textit{PK\_PUBLIC} then the buffer \textit{in} contains a binary representation of \textit{y} part of the key.
+
+\index{dsa\_generate\_key()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int dsa_generate_key(prng_state *prng,
+                            int  wprng,
+                        dsa_key *key);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This function generates a private DSA key containing both \textit{x} and \textit{y} parts.
+
+\chapter{Standards Support}
+\mysection{ASN.1 Formats}
+LibTomCrypt supports a variety of ASN.1 data types encoded with the Distinguished Encoding Rules (DER) suitable for various cryptographic protocols.  The data types
+are all provided with three basic functions with \textit{similar} prototypes.  One function has been dedicated to calculate the length in octets of a given
+format, and two functions have been dedicated to encoding and decoding the format.
+
+On top of the basic data types are the SEQUENCE and SET data types which are collections of other ASN.1 types.  They are provided
+in the same manner as the other data types except they use list of objects known as the \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list} structure.  It is defined as the following:
+
+\index{ltc\_asn1\_list structure}
+\begin{verbatim}
+typedef struct {
+   ltc_asn1_type          type;
+   void                  *data;
+   unsigned long          size;
+   int                    used;
+   struct ltc_asn1_list_ *prev,  *next,
+                         *child, *parent;
+} ltc_asn1_list;
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\index{LTC\_SET\_ASN1 macro}
+The \textit{type} field is one of the following ASN.1 field definitions.  The \textit{data} pointer is a void pointer to the data to be encoded (or the destination) and the
+\textit{size} field is specific to what you are encoding (e.g. number of bits in the BIT STRING data type).  The \textit{used} field is primarily for the CHOICE decoder
+and reflects if the particular member of a list was the decoded data type.  To help build the lists in an orderly fashion the macro
+\textit{LTC\_SET\_ASN1(list, index, Type, Data, Size)} has been provided.
+
+It will assign to the \textit{index}th position in the \textit{list} the triplet (Type, Data, Size).  An example usage would be:
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+...
+ltc_asn1_list   sequence[3];
+unsigned long   three=3;
+
+LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, 0, LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING,    "hello", 5);
+LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, 1, LTC_ASN1_SHORT_INTEGER, &three,  1);
+LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, 2, LTC_ASN1_NULL,           NULL,   0);
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+The macro is relatively safe with respect to modifying variables, for instance the following code is equivalent.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+...
+ltc_asn1_list   sequence[3];
+unsigned long   three=3;
+int             x=0;
+LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, x++, LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING,    "hello", 5);
+LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, x++, LTC_ASN1_SHORT_INTEGER, &three,  1);
+LTC_SET_ASN1(sequence, x++, LTC_ASN1_NULL,           NULL,   0);
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\begin{figure}[h]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
+\hline \textbf{Definition}           & \textbf{ASN.1 Type} \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_EOL                & End of a ASN.1 list structure. \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_BOOLEAN            & BOOLEAN type \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_INTEGER            & INTEGER (uses mp\_int) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_SHORT\_INTEGER     & INTEGER (32--bit using unsigned long) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_BIT\_STRING        & BIT STRING (one bit per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_OCTET\_STRING      & OCTET STRING (one octet per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_NULL               & NULL \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_OBJECT\_IDENTIFIER & OBJECT IDENTIFIER  \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_IA5\_STRING        & IA5 STRING (one octet per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_PRINTABLE\_STRING  & PRINTABLE STRING (one octet per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_UTF8\_STRING       & UTF8 STRING (one wchar\_t per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_UTCTIME            & UTCTIME (see ltc\_utctime structure) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_CHOICE             & CHOICE \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_SEQUENCE           & SEQUENCE (and SEQUENCE OF) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_SET                & SET \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_SETOF              & SET OF \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_RAW\_BIT\_STRING   & BIT STRING (one octet per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_TELETEX\_STRING    & TELETEX STRING (one octet per char) \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_CONSTRUCTED        & A constructed type that is not SEQUENCE or SET \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_CONTEXT\_SPECIFIC  & A context-specific type \\
+\hline LTC\_ASN1\_GENERALIZEDTIME    & GeneralizedTime (see ltc\_generalizedtime structure) \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\caption{List of ASN.1 Supported Types}
+\index{ltc\_asn1\_type}
+\end{small}
+\end{center}
+\end{figure}
+
+\subsection{SEQUENCE Type}
+The SEQUENCE data type is a collection of other ASN.1 data types encapsulated with a small header which is a useful way of sending multiple data types in one packet.
+
+\subsubsection{SEQUENCE Encoding}
+To encode a sequence a \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list} array must be initialized with the members of the sequence and their respective pointers.  The encoding is performed
+with the following function.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_sequence()}\index{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_sequence(ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                        unsigned long  inlen,
+                        unsigned char *out,
+                        unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+This encodes a sequence of items pointed to by \textit{list} where the list has \textit{inlen} items in it.  The SEQUENCE will be encoded to \textit{out} and of length \textit{outlen}.  The
+function will terminate when it reads all the items out of the list (upto \textit{inlen}) or it encounters an item in the list with a type of \textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL}.
+
+The \textit{data} pointer in the list would be the same pointer you would pass to the respective ASN.1 encoder (e.g. der\_encode\_bit\_string()) and it is simply passed on
+verbatim to the dependent encoder.  The list can contain other SEQUENCE or SET types which enables you to have nested SEQUENCE and SET definitions.  In these cases
+the \textit{data} pointer is simply a pointer to another \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list}.
+
+\subsubsection{SEQUENCE Decoding}
+
+\index{der\_decode\_sequence()}
+
+Decoding a SEQUENCE is similar to encoding.  You set up an array of \textbf{ltc\_asn1\_list} where in this case the \textit{size} member is the maximum size
+(in certain cases).  For types such as IA5 STRING, BIT STRING, OCTET STRING (etc) the \textit{size} field is updated after successful decoding to reflect how many
+units of the respective type has been loaded.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_decode_sequence(const unsigned char *in,
+                              unsigned long  inlen,
+                              ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                              unsigned long  outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will decode upto \textit{outlen} items from the input buffer \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.  The function will stop (gracefully) when it runs out of items to decode.
+It will fail (for among other reasons) when it runs out of input bytes to read, a data type is invalid or a heap failure occurred.
+
+For the following types the \textit{size} field will be updated to reflect the number of units read of the given type.
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item BIT STRING
+   \item OCTET STRING
+   \item OBJECT IDENTIFIER
+   \item IA5 STRING
+   \item PRINTABLE STRING
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsubsection{SEQUENCE Length}
+
+The length of a SEQUENCE can be determined with the following function.
+
+\index{der\_length\_sequence()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_length_sequence(ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                        unsigned long  inlen,
+                        unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will get the encoding size for the given \textit{list} of length \textit{inlen} and store it in \textit{outlen}.
+
+\subsubsection{SEQUENCE Multiple Argument Lists}\index{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL}
+
+For small or simple sequences an encoding or decoding can be performed with one of the following two functions.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_sequence\_multi()}
+\index{der\_decode\_sequence\_multi()}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_sequence_multi(unsigned char *out,
+                              unsigned long *outlen, ...);
+
+int der_decode_sequence_multi(const unsigned char *in,
+                                    unsigned long  inlen, ...);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These either encode or decode (respectively) a SEQUENCE data type where the items in the sequence are specified after the length parameter.
+
+The list of items are specified as a triple of the form \textit{(type, size, data)}  where \textit{type} is an \textbf{int}, \textit{size} is a \textbf{unsigned long}
+and \textit{data} is \textbf{void} pointer.  The list of items must be terminated with an item with the type \textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL}.
+
+It is ideal that you cast the \textit{size} values to unsigned long to ensure that the proper data type is passed to the function.  Constants such as \textit{1} without
+a cast or prototype are of type \textbf{int} by default.  Appending \textit{UL} or pre-pending \textit{(unsigned long)} is enough to cast it to the correct type.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+unsigned char buf[MAXBUFSIZE];
+unsigned long buflen;
+int           err;
+
+   buflen = sizeof(buf);
+   if ((err =
+        der_encode_sequence_multi(buf, &buflen,
+        LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING, 5UL, "Hello",
+        LTC_ASN1_IA5_STRING, 7UL, " World!",
+        LTC_ASN1_EOL,        0UL, NULL)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+      // error handling
+   }
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+This example encodes a SEQUENCE with two IA5 STRING types containing ``Hello'' and `` World!'' respectively.  Note the usage of the \textbf{UL} modifier
+on the size parameters.  This forces the compiler to pass the numbers as the required \textbf{unsigned long} type that the function expects.
+
+\subsection{SET and SET OF}
+
+\index{SET} \index{SET OF}
+SET and SET OF are related to the SEQUENCE type in that they can be pretty much be decoded with the same code.  However, they are different, and they should
+be carefully noted.  The SET type is an unordered array of ASN.1 types sorted by the TAG (type identifier), whereas the SET OF type is an ordered array of
+a \textbf{single} ASN.1 object sorted in ascending order by the DER their respective encodings.
+
+\subsubsection{SET Encoding}
+
+SETs use the same array structure of ltc\_asn1\_list that the SEQUENCE functions use.  They are encoded with the following function:
+
+\index{der\_encode\_set()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_set(ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                   unsigned long  inlen,
+                   unsigned char *out,
+                   unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will encode the list of ASN.1 objects in \textit{list} of length \textit{inlen} objects, and store the output in \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen} bytes.
+The function will make a copy of the list provided, and sort it by the TAG.  Objects with identical TAGs are additionally sorted on their original placement in the
+array (to make the process deterministic).
+
+This function will \textbf{NOT} recognize \textit{DEFAULT} objects, and it is the responsibility of the caller to remove them as required.
+
+\subsubsection{SET Decoding}
+
+The SET type can be decoded with the following function.
+
+\index{der\_decode\_set()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_decode_set(const unsigned char *in,
+                         unsigned long  inlen,
+                         ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                         unsigned long  outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will decode the SET specified by \textit{list} of length \textit{outlen} objects from the input buffer \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen} octets.
+
+It handles the fact that SETs are not strictly ordered and will make multiple passes (as required) through the list to decode all the objects.
+
+\subsubsection{SET Length}
+The length of a SET can be determined by calling der\_length\_sequence() since they have the same encoding length.
+
+\subsubsection{SET OF Encoding}
+A \textit{SET OF} object is an array of identical objects (e.g. OCTET STRING) sorted in ascending order by the DER encoding of the object.  They are
+used to store objects deterministically based solely on their encoding.  It uses the same array structure of ltc\_asn1\_list that the SEQUENCE functions
+use.  They are encoded with the following function.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_setof()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_setof(ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                     unsigned long  inlen,
+                     unsigned char *out,
+                     unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will encode a \textit{SET OF} containing the \textit{list} of \textit{inlen} ASN.1 objects and store the encoding in the output buffer \textit{out} of length \textit{outlen}.
+
+The routine will first encode the SET OF in an unordered fashion (in a temporary buffer) then sort using the XQSORT macro and copy back to the output buffer.  This
+means you need at least enough memory to keep an additional copy of the output on the heap.
+
+\subsubsection{SET OF Decoding}
+Since the decoding of a \textit{SET OF} object is unambiguous it can be decoded with der\_decode\_sequence().
+
+\subsubsection{SET OF Length}
+Like the SET type the der\_length\_sequence() function can be used to determine the length of a \textit{SET OF} object.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 INTEGER}
+
+To encode or decode INTEGER data types use the following functions.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_integer()}\index{der\_decode\_integer()}\index{der\_length\_integer()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_integer(         void *num,
+                       unsigned char *out,
+                       unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_integer(const unsigned char *in,
+                             unsigned long  inlen,
+                                      void *num);
+
+int der_length_integer(         void *num,
+                       unsigned long *len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode a signed INTEGER data type using the bignum data type to store the large INTEGER.  To encode smaller values without allocating
+a bignum to store the value, the \textit{short} INTEGER functions were made available.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_short\_integer()}\index{der\_decode\_short\_integer()}\index{der\_length\_short\_integer()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_short_integer(unsigned long  num,
+                             unsigned char *out,
+                             unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_short_integer(const unsigned char *in,
+                                   unsigned long  inlen,
+                                   unsigned long *num);
+
+int der_length_short_integer(unsigned long  num,
+                             unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode an unsigned \textbf{unsigned long} type (only reads upto 32--bits).  For values in the range $0 \dots 2^{32} - 1$ the integer
+and short integer functions can encode and decode each others outputs.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 BIT STRING}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_bit\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_bit\_string()}\index{der\_length\_bit\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_bit_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                unsigned long  inlen,
+                                unsigned char *out,
+                                unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_bit_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                unsigned long  inlen,
+                                unsigned char *out,
+                                unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_bit_string(unsigned long  nbits,
+                          unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode a BIT STRING data type.  The bits are passed in (or read out) using one \textbf{char} per bit.  A non--zero value will be interpreted
+as a one bit, and a zero value a zero bit.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 RAW BIT STRING}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_raw\_bit\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_raw\_bit\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_raw_bit_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                    unsigned long  inlen,
+                                    unsigned char *out,
+                                    unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_raw_bit_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                    unsigned long  inlen,
+                                    unsigned char *out,
+                                    unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode a BIT STRING data type.
+The bits are passed in (or read out) using one \textbf{unsigned char} per 8 bit.
+
+This function differs from the normal BIT STRING, as it can be used to directly
+process raw binary data and store it to resp. read it from an ASN.1 BIT STRING
+data type.
+
+The length function is the same as for the normal BIT STRING \textit{der\_length\_bit\_string()}.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 OCTET STRING}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_octet\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_octet\_string()}\index{der\_length\_octet\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_octet_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                  unsigned long  inlen,
+                                  unsigned char *out,
+                                  unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_octet_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                  unsigned long  inlen,
+                                  unsigned char *out,
+                                  unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_octet_string(unsigned long  noctets,
+                            unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode an OCTET STRING data type.  The octets are stored using one \textbf{unsigned char} each.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_object\_identifier()}\index{der\_decode\_object\_identifier()}\index{der\_length\_object\_identifier()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_object_identifier(unsigned long *words,
+                                 unsigned long  nwords,
+                                 unsigned char *out,
+                                 unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_object_identifier(const unsigned char *in,
+                                       unsigned long  inlen,
+                                       unsigned long *words,
+                                       unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_object_identifier(unsigned long *words,
+                                 unsigned long  nwords,
+                                 unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode an OBJECT IDENTIFIER object.  The words of the OID are stored in individual \textbf{unsigned long} elements, and must be in the range
+$0 \ldots 2^{32} - 1$.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 IA5 STRING}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_ia5\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_ia5\_string()}\index{der\_length\_ia5\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_ia5_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                unsigned long  inlen,
+                                unsigned char *out,
+                                unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_ia5_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                unsigned long  inlen,
+                                unsigned char *out,
+                                unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_ia5_string(const unsigned char *octets,
+                                unsigned long  noctets,
+                                unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode an IA5 STRING.  The characters are read or stored in individual \textbf{char} elements.  These functions performs internal character
+to numerical conversions based on the conventions of the compiler being used.  For instance, on an x86\_32 machine 'A' == 65 but the same may not be true on
+say a SPARC machine.  Internally, these functions have a table of literal characters and their numerical ASCII values.  This provides a stable conversion provided
+that the build platform honours the run--time platforms character conventions.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 TELETEX STRING}
+
+\index{der\_decode\_teletex\_string()}\index{der\_length\_teletex\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_decode_teletex_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                    unsigned long  inlen,
+                                    unsigned char *out,
+                                    unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_teletex_string(const unsigned char *octets,
+                                    unsigned long  noctets,
+                                    unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will decode a TELETEX STRING.
+The characters are read in individual \textbf{char} elements.
+The internal structure is similar to that of the IA5 STRING implementation, to
+be able to provide a stable conversion independent of the build-- and run--time
+platform.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 PRINTABLE STRING}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_printable\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_printable\_string()}\index{der\_length\_printable\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_printable_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                                      unsigned char *out,
+                                      unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_printable_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                      unsigned long  inlen,
+                                      unsigned char *out,
+                                      unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_printable_string(const unsigned char *octets,
+                                      unsigned long  noctets,
+                                      unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode an PRINTABLE STRING.  The characters are read or stored in individual \textbf{char} elements.  These functions performs internal character
+to numerical conversions based on the conventions of the compiler being used.  For instance, on an x86\_32 machine 'A' == 65 but the same may not be true on
+say a SPARC machine.  Internally, these functions have a table of literal characters and their numerical ASCII values.  This provides a stable conversion provided
+that the build platform honours the run-time platforms character conventions.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 UTF8 STRING}
+
+\index{der\_encode\_utf8\_string()}\index{der\_decode\_utf8\_string()}\index{der\_length\_utf8\_string()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_utf8_string(const wchar_t *in,
+                           unsigned long  inlen,
+                           unsigned char *out,
+                           unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_utf8_string(const unsigned char *in,
+                                 unsigned long  inlen,
+                                       wchar_t *out,
+                                 unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_length_utf8_string(const wchar_t *octets,
+                           unsigned long  noctets,
+                           unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+These will encode or decode an UTF8 STRING.  The characters are read or stored in individual \textbf{wchar\_t} elements.  These function performs no internal
+mapping and treat the characters as literals.
+
+These functions use the \textbf{wchar\_t} type which is not universally available.  In those cases, the library will typedef it to \textbf{unsigned long}.  If you
+intend to use the ISO C functions for working with wide--char arrays, you should make sure that wchar\_t has been defined previously.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 UTCTIME}
+
+The UTCTIME type is to store a date and time in ASN.1 format.  It uses the following structure to organize the time.
+
+\index{ltc\_utctime structure}
+\begin{verbatim}
+typedef struct {
+   unsigned YY, /* year    00--99 */
+            MM, /* month   01--12 */
+            DD, /* day     01--31 */
+            hh, /* hour    00--23 */
+            mm, /* minute  00--59 */
+            ss, /* second  00--59 */
+            off_dir, /* timezone offset direction 0 == +, 1 == - */
+            off_hh, /* timezone offset hours */
+            off_mm; /* timezone offset minutes */
+} ltc_utctime;
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The time can be offset plus or minus a set amount of hours (off\_hh) and minutes (off\_mm).  When \textit{off\_dir} is zero, the time will be added otherwise it
+will be subtracted.  For instance, the array $\lbrace 5, 6, 20, 22, 4, 00, 0, 5, 0 \rbrace$ represents the current time of
+\textit{2005, June 20th, 22:04:00} with a time offset of +05h00.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_utctime()}\index{der\_decode\_utctime()}\index{der\_length\_utctime()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_utctime(  ltc_utctime *utctime,
+                       unsigned char *out,
+                       unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_utctime(const unsigned char *in,
+                             unsigned long *inlen,
+                               ltc_utctime *out);
+
+int der_length_utctime(  ltc_utctime *utctime,
+                       unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The encoder will store time in one of the two ASN.1 formats, either \textit{YYMMDDhhmmssZ} or \textit{YYMMDDhhmmss$\pm$hhmm}, and perform minimal error checking on the
+input.  The decoder will read all valid ASN.1 formats and perform range checking on the values (not complete but rational) useful for catching packet errors.
+
+It is suggested that decoded data be further scrutinized (e.g. days of month in particular).
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 GeneralizedTime}
+
+The GeneralizedTime type is to store a date and time in ASN.1 format.  It uses the following structure to organize the time.
+
+\index{ltc\_utctime structure}
+\begin{verbatim}
+typedef struct {
+   unsigned YYYY, /* year              0--9999 */
+            MM, /* month               1--12 */
+            DD, /* day                 1--31 */
+            hh, /* hour                0--23 */
+            mm, /* minute              0--59 */
+            ss, /* second              0--59 */
+            fs, /* fractional seconds  1--UINT_MAX */
+            off_dir, /* timezone offset direction 0 == +, 1 == - */
+            off_hh, /* timezone offset hours */
+            off_mm; /* timezone offset minutes */
+} ltc_generalizedtime;
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The time can be offset plus or minus a set amount of hours (off\_hh) and minutes (off\_mm).  When \textit{off\_dir} is zero, the time will be added otherwise it
+will be subtracted.  For instance, the array $\lbrace 2005, 6, 20, 22, 4, 0, 122, 0, 5, 0 \rbrace$ represents the current time of
+\textit{2005, June 20th, 22:04:00.122} with a time offset of +05h00.
+
+\index{der\_encode\_utctime()}\index{der\_decode\_utctime()}\index{der\_length\_utctime()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_encode_generalizedtime(ltc_generalizedtime *gtime,
+                               unsigned char       *out,
+                               unsigned long       *outlen);
+
+int der_decode_generalizedtime(const unsigned char *in,
+                               unsigned long       *inlen,
+                               ltc_generalizedtime *out);
+
+int der_length_generalizedtime(ltc_generalizedtime *gtime,
+                               unsigned long       *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The encoder will store time in one of the following ASN.1 formats, either \textit{YYYYMMDDhhmmssZ} or
+\textit{YYYYMMDDhhmmss$\pm$hhmm} or\textit{YYYYMMDDhhmmss.fsZ} or \textit{YYYYMMDDhhmmss.fs$\pm$hhmm},
+and perform minimal error checking on the input.
+The decoder will read all valid ASN.1 formats and perform range checking on the values (not complete but
+rational) useful for catching packet errors.
+
+The fractional seconds are always added in case they are not $0$.
+The implementation of fractional seconds is currently unreliable and you can't detect decoded
+resp. encode leading $0$'s (e.g. \textit{20170424232717.005Z} would be decoded as
+\textit{22. April 2017, 23:27:17.5}).
+
+It is suggested that decoded data be further scrutinized (e.g. days of month in particular).
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 CHOICE}
+
+The CHOICE ASN.1 type represents a union of ASN.1 types all of which are stored in a \textit{ltc\_asn1\_list}.  There is no encoder for the CHOICE type, only a
+decoder.  The decoder will scan through the provided list attempting to use the appropriate decoder on the input packet.  The list can contain any ASN.1 data
+type\footnote{Except it cannot have LTC\_ASN1\_INTEGER and LTC\_ASN1\_SHORT\_INTEGER simultaneously.} except for other CHOICE types.
+
+There is no encoder for the CHOICE type as the actual DER encoding is the encoding of the chosen type.
+
+\index{der\_decode\_choice()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int der_decode_choice(const unsigned char *in,
+                            unsigned long *inlen,
+                            ltc_asn1_list *list,
+                            unsigned long  outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will decode the input in the \textit{in} field of length \textit{inlen}.  It uses the provided ASN.1 list specified in the \textit{list} field which has
+\textit{outlen} elements.  The \textit{inlen} field will be updated with the length of the decoded data type, as well as the respective entry in the \textit{list} field
+will have the \textit{used} flag set to non--zero to reflect it was the data type decoded.
+
+\subsection{ASN.1 Flexi Decoder}
+The ASN.1 \textit{flexi} decoder allows the developer to decode arbitrary ASN.1 DER packets (provided they use data types LibTomCrypt supports) without first knowing
+the structure of the data.  Where der\_decode\_sequence() requires the developer to specify the data types to decode in advance the flexi decoder is entirely
+free form.
+
+The flexi decoder uses the same \textit{ltc\_asn1\_list} but instead of being stored in an array it uses the linked list pointers \textit{prev}, \textit{next}, \textit{parent}
+and \textit{child}.  The list works as a \textit{doubly-linked list} structure where decoded items at the same level are siblings (using next and prev) and items
+encoded in a SEQUENCE are stored as a child element.
+
+When a SEQUENCE or SET has been encountered a SEQUENCE (or SET resp.) item will be added as a sibling (e.g. list.type == LTC\_ASN1\_SEQUENCE) and the child
+pointer points to a new list of items contained within the object.
+
+\index{der\_decode\_sequence\_flexi()}
+\index{LTC\_ASN1\_CONSTRUCTED}
+\index{LTC\_ASN1\_CONTEXT\_SPECIFIC}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int  der_decode_sequence_flexi(const unsigned char *in,
+                                     unsigned long *inlen,
+                                    ltc_asn1_list **out);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will decode items in the \textit{in} buffer of max input length \textit{inlen} and store the newly created pointer to the list in \textit{out}.  This function allocates
+all required memory for the decoding.  It stores the number of octets read back into \textit{inlen}.
+
+The function will terminate when either it hits an invalid ASN.1 tag, or it reads \textit{inlen} octets.  An early termination is a soft error, and returns
+normally.  The decoded list \textit{out} will point to the very first element of the list (e.g. both parent and prev pointers will be \textbf{NULL}).
+
+An invalid decoding will terminate the process, and free the allocated memory automatically.
+
+The flexi decoder calls itself when decoding a constructed type. This leads to
+a 'child process' that will terminate when it decodes an unkown/invalid
+identifier and leaves an allocated but uninitialized child element.
+However the parent processing will continue with a "soft-error".
+This can be detected by checking for \textit{child} elements with
+type \textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_EOL} after decoding.
+
+As of v1.18.0 the flexi decoder will also decode arbitrary constructed types
+other than SEQUENCE and SET. The \textit{type} field will be set to
+\textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_CONSTRUCTED} and the plain identifier that was indicated in the ASN.1
+encoding is stored in the \textit{used} field. Further decoding is done in the
+same way as if it were a SEQUENCE or SET.
+
+Also as of v1.18.0 the flexi decoder is capable to handle
+\textit{context-specific} encodings. The \textit{type} field will be set to
+\textbf{LTC\_ASN1\_CONTEXT\_SPECIFIC} and the plain identifier that was indicated
+in the ASN.1 encoding is stored in the \textit{used} field. Encapsulated data
+in the \textit{context-specific} encoding is copied to newly allocated memory
+and is accessible through the \textit{data} field.
+
+\textbf{Note:} the list decoded by this function is \textbf{NOT} in the correct form for der\_encode\_sequence() to use directly.  You will first
+have to convert the list by first storing all of the siblings in an array then storing all the children as sub-lists of a sequence using the \textit{.data}
+pointer.  Currently no function in LibTomCrypt provides this ability.
+
+\subsubsection{Sample Decoding}
+Suppose we decode the following structure:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+User ::= SEQUENCE {
+   Name        IA5 STRING
+   LoginToken  SEQUENCE {
+      passwdHash   OCTET STRING
+      pubkey       ECCPublicKey
+   }
+   LastOn      UTCTIME
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+\begin{flushleft}and we decoded it with the following code:\end{flushleft}
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+unsigned char inbuf[MAXSIZE];
+unsigned long inbuflen;
+ltc_asn1_list *list;
+int           err;
+
+/* somehow fill inbuf/inbuflen */
+if ((err = der_decode_sequence_flexi(inbuf, inbuflen, &list)) != CRYPT_OK) {
+   printf("Error decoding: %s\n", error_to_string(err));
+   exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+At this point \textit{list} would point to the SEQUENCE identified by \textit{User}.  It would have no sibblings (prev or next), and only a child node.  Walking to the child
+node with the following code will bring us to the \textit{Name} portion of the SEQUENCE:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+list = list->child;
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+Now \textit{list} points to the \textit{Name} member (with the tag IA5 STRING).  The \textit{data}, \textit{size}, and \textit{type} members of \textit{list} should reflect
+that of an IA5 STRING.  The sibbling will now be the \textit{LoginToken} SEQUENCE.  The sibbling has a child node which points to the \textit{passwdHash} OCTET STRING.
+We can walk to this node with the following code:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+/* list already pointing to 'Name' */
+list = list->next->child;
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+At this point, \textit{list} will point to the \textit{passwdHash} member of the innermost SEQUENCE.  This node has a sibbling, the \textit{pubkey} member of the SEQUENCE.
+The \textit{LastOn} member of the SEQUENCE is a sibbling of the LoginToken node, if we wanted to walk there we would have to go up and over via:
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+list = list->parent->next;
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+At this point, we are pointing to the last node of the list.  Lists are terminated in all directions by a \textbf{NULL} pointer.  All nodes are doubly linked so that you
+can walk up and down the nodes without keeping pointers lying around.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Shrink'ing a Flexi List}
+While decoding the flexi decoder will recursively decode an ASN.1 \textit{constructed} type it will store the decoded list
+as well as the plain data that was decoded.
+To free up this additional data a shrink function is provided.
+
+\index{der\_sequence\_shrink()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void der_sequence_shrink(ltc_asn1_list *in);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will free all the plain constructed data, but keep the decoded list intact.
+
+\subsubsection{Free'ing a Flexi List}
+To free the list use the following function.
+
+\index{der\_sequence\_free()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void der_sequence_free(ltc_asn1_list *in);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will free all of the memory allocated by der\_decode\_sequence\_flexi().
+
+\mysection{Password Based Cryptography}
+\subsection{PKCS \#5}
+\index{PKCS \#5}
+In order to securely handle user passwords for the purposes of creating session keys and chaining IVs the PKCS \#5 was drafted.   PKCS \#5
+is made up of two algorithms, Algorithm One and Algorithm Two.  Algorithm One is the older fairly limited algorithm which has been implemented
+for completeness.  Algorithm Two is a bit more modern and more flexible to work with.
+
+The OpenSSL project implemented an extension to Algorithm One that allows for arbitrary keylengths; we have a compatible implementation described below.
+
+\subsection{Algorithm One}
+Algorithm One accepts as input a password, an 8--byte salt, and an iteration counter.  The iteration counter is meant to act as delay for
+people trying to brute force guess the password.  The higher the iteration counter the longer the delay.  This algorithm also requires a hash
+algorithm and produces an output no longer than the output of the hash.
+
+\index{pkcs\_5\_alg1()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_5_alg1(const unsigned char *password,
+                      unsigned long  password_len,
+                const unsigned char *salt,
+                                int  iteration_count,
+                                int  hash_idx,
+                      unsigned char *out,
+                      unsigned long *outlen)
+\end{alltt}
+Where \textit{password} is the user's password.  Since the algorithm allows binary passwords you must also specify the length in \textit{password\_len}.
+The \textit{salt} is a fixed size 8--byte array which should be random for each user and session.  The \textit{iteration\_count} is the delay desired
+on the password.  The \textit{hash\_idx} is the index of the hash you wish to use in the descriptor table.
+
+The output of length up to \textit{outlen} is stored in \textit{out}.  If \textit{outlen} is initially larger than the size of the hash functions output
+it is set to the number of bytes stored.  If it is smaller than not all of the hash output is stored in \textit{out}.
+
+\index{pkcs\_5\_alg1\_openssl()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_5_alg1_openssl(const unsigned char *password,
+                      unsigned long  password_len,
+                const unsigned char *salt,
+                                int  iteration_count,
+                                int  hash_idx,
+                      unsigned char *out,
+                      unsigned long *outlen)
+\end{alltt}
+As above, but we generate as many bytes as requested in outlen per the OpenSSL extension to Algorithm One.  If you are trying to be compatible with OpenSSL's EVP\_BytesToKey() or the "openssl enc" command line (or variants such as perl's Crypt::CBC), then use this function with MD5 as your hash (ick!) and iteration\_count=1 (double-ick!!).
+\subsection{Algorithm Two}
+
+Algorithm Two is the recommended algorithm for this task.  It allows variable length salts, and can produce outputs larger than the
+hash functions output.  As such, it can easily be used to derive session keys for ciphers and MACs as well initialization vectors as required
+from a single password and invocation of this algorithm.
+
+\index{pkcs\_5\_alg2()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int pkcs_5_alg2(const unsigned char *password,
+                      unsigned long  password_len,
+                const unsigned char *salt,
+                      unsigned long  salt_len,
+                                int  iteration_count,
+                                int  hash_idx,
+                      unsigned char *out,
+                      unsigned long *outlen)
+\end{alltt}
+Where \textit{password} is the users password.  Since the algorithm allows binary passwords you must also specify the length in \textit{password\_len}.
+The \textit{salt} is an array of size \textit{salt\_len}.  It should be random for each user and session.  The \textit{iteration\_count} is the delay desired
+on the password.  The \textit{hash\_idx} is the index of the hash you wish to use in the descriptor table.   The output of length up to
+\textit{outlen} is stored in \textit{out}.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+/* demo to show how to make session state material
+ * from a password */
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+int main(void)
+{
+    unsigned char password[100], salt[100],
+                  cipher_key[16], cipher_iv[16],
+                  mac_key[16], outbuf[48];
+    int           err, hash_idx;
+    unsigned long outlen, password_len, salt_len;
+
+    /* register hash and get it's idx .... */
+
+    /* get users password and make up a salt ... */
+
+    /* create the material (100 iterations in algorithm) */
+    outlen = sizeof(outbuf);
+    if ((err = pkcs_5_alg2(password, password_len, salt,
+                           salt_len, 100, hash_idx, outbuf,
+                           &outlen))
+       != CRYPT_OK) {
+       /* error handle */
+    }
+
+    /* now extract it */
+    memcpy(cipher_key, outbuf, 16);
+    memcpy(cipher_iv,  outbuf+16, 16);
+    memcpy(mac_key,    outbuf+32, 16);
+
+    /* use material (recall to store the salt in the output) */
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{Key Derviation Functions}
+\subsection{HKDF}
+\index{HKDF}
+A key derivation function (KDF) is a basic and essential component of cryptographic systems.  Its goal is to take some source of initial
+keying material and derive from it one or more cryptographically strong secret keys.
+
+HKDF follows the "extract-then-expand" paradigm, where the KDF logically consists of two modules.  The first stage takes the input
+keying material and "extracts" from it a fixed-length pseudorandom key K.  The second stage "expands" the key K into several additional
+pseudorandom keys (the output of the KDF).
+
+In many applications, the input keying material is not necessarily distributed uniformly, and the attacker may have some partial
+knowledge about it (for example, a Diffie-Hellman value computed by a key exchange protocol) or even partial control of it (as in some
+entropy-gathering applications).  Thus, the goal of the "extract" stage is to "concentrate" the possibly dispersed entropy of the input
+keying material into a short, but cryptographically strong, pseudorandom key.  In some applications, the input may already be a
+good pseudorandom key; in these cases, the "extract" stage is not necessary, and the "expand" part can be used alone.
+
+The second stage "expands" the pseudorandom key to the desired length; the number and lengths of the output keys depend on the
+specific cryptographic algorithms for which the keys are needed.
+
+\subsection{HKDF Extract}
+To perform the extraction phase, use the following function:
+
+\index{hkdf\_extract()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int hkdf_extract(   int  hash_idx,
+    const unsigned char *salt,
+          unsigned long  saltlen,
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{alltt}
+The \textit{hash\_idx} parameter is the index into the descriptor table of the hash you want to use.
+The \textit{salt} parameter is a pointer to the array of octets of length \textit{saltlen} containing the salt or a NULL pointer if a salt is not being used (in that case set saltlen to 0).
+\textit{in} is a pointer to an array of octets of length \textit{inlen} containing the source entropy.  The extracted output is stored in the location pointed to by \textit{out}.
+You must set \textit{outlen} to the size of the destination buffer before calling this function. It is updated to the length of the extracted output. If \textit{outlen} is too small the extracted output will be truncated.
+
+While the salt is optional, using one improves HKDF's security. If used, the salt should be randomly chosen, but does not need to be secret and may be re-used. Please see RFC5869 section 3.1 for more details.
+
+\subsection{HKDF Expand}
+To perform the expansion phase, use the following function:
+
+\index{hkdf\_expand()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int hkdf_expand(    int  hash_idx,
+    const unsigned char *info,
+          unsigned long  infolen,
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long  outlen);
+\end{alltt}
+
+The \textit{hash\_idx} parameter is the index into the descriptor table of the hash you want to use.
+The \textit{info} parameter, an array of octets of length \textit{infolen}, is an optional parameter (set \textit{info} to NULL and \textit{infolen} to 0 if not using it) which
+may be used to bind the derived keys to some application and context specific information. This prevents the same keying material from being generated in different contexts. Please see RFC5869 section 3.2 for more information.
+The extracted keying material is passed as octet array \textit{in} of length \textit{inlen}.  Expanded output of length \textit{outlen} is generated and stored in octet arrat \textit{out}.
+
+\subsection{HKDF Extract-and-Expand}
+To perform both phases together, use the following function:
+
+\index{hkdf()}
+\begin{alltt}
+int hkdf(           int  hash_idx,
+    const unsigned char *salt,
+          unsigned long  saltlen,
+    const unsigned char *info,
+          unsigned long  infolen,
+    const unsigned char *in,
+          unsigned long  inlen,
+          unsigned char *out,
+          unsigned long  outlen);
+\end{alltt}
+
+Parameters are as in \textit{hkdf\_extract()} and \textit{hkdf\_expand()}.
+
+\chapter{Miscellaneous}
+\mysection{Base64 Encoding and Decoding}
+The library provides functions to encode and decode a RFC 4648 Base64 coding scheme.
+
+\subsection{Standard 'base64' encoding}
+The characters used in the mappings are:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789+/
+\end{verbatim}
+Those characters are supported in the 7-bit ASCII map, which means they can be used for transport over
+common e-mail, usenet and HTTP mediums.  The format of an encoded stream is just a literal sequence of ASCII characters
+where a group of four represent 24-bits of input.  The first four chars of the encoders output is the length of the
+original input.  After the first four characters is the rest of the message.
+
+Often, it is desirable to line wrap the output to fit nicely in an e-mail or usenet posting.  The decoder allows you to
+put any character (that is not in the above sequence) in between any character of the encoders output.  You may not however,
+break up the first four characters.
+
+To encode a binary string in base64 call:
+\index{base64\_encode()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int base64_encode(const unsigned char *in,
+                        unsigned long  len,
+                        unsigned char *out,
+                        unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+Where \textit{in} is the binary string and \textit{out} is where the ASCII output is placed.  You must set the value of \textit{outlen} prior
+to calling this function and it sets the length of the base64 output in \textit{outlen} when it is done.  To decode a base64
+string call:
+\index{base64\_decode()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int base64_decode(const unsigned char *in,
+                        unsigned long  len,
+                        unsigned char *out,
+                        unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The function \textit{base64\_decode} works in a relaxed way which allows decoding some inputs that do not strictly follow the standard.
+If you want to be strict during decoding you can use:
+\index{base64\_strict\_decode()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int base64_strict_decode(const unsigned char *in,
+                               unsigned long  len,
+                               unsigned char *out,
+                               unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{URL--safe 'base64url' encoding}
+The characters used in the mappings are:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789-_
+\end{verbatim}
+Those characters are sometimes also called URL and filename safe alphabet.
+The interface is analogous to \textit{base64\_xxxx} functions in previous chapter.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+int base64url_encode(const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long len,
+                           unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int base64url_strict_encode(const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long inlen,
+                                  unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int base64url_decode(const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long len,
+                           unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+
+int base64url_strict_decode(const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long len,
+                                  unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\mysection{Primality Testing}
+\index{Primality Testing}
+The library includes primality testing and random prime functions as well.  The primality tester will perform the test in
+two phases.  First it will perform trial division by the first few primes.  Second it will perform \textit{LTC\_MILLER\_RABIN\_REPS} (pre-defined to $35$) rounds of the
+Rabin-Miller primality testing algorithm.  If the candidate passes both phases it is declared prime otherwise it is declared
+composite.  No prime number will fail the two phases but composites can.  Each round of the Rabin-Miller algorithm reduces
+the probability of a pseudo-prime by $1 \over 4$ therefore after sixteen rounds the probability is no more than
+$\left ( { 1 \over 4 } \right )^{8} = 2^{-16}$.  In practice the probability of error is in fact much lower than that.
+
+When making random primes the trial division step is in fact an optimized implementation of \textit{Implementation of Fast RSA Key Generation on Smart Cards}\footnote{Chenghuai Lu, Andre L. M. dos Santos and Francisco R. Pimentel}.
+In essence a table of machine-word sized residues are kept of a candidate modulo a set of primes.  When the candidate
+is rejected and ultimately incremented to test the next number the residues are updated without using multi-word precision
+math operations.  As a result the routine can scan ahead to the next number required for testing with very little work
+involved.
+
+In the event that a composite did make it through it would most likely cause the the algorithm trying to use it to fail.  For
+instance, in RSA two primes $p$ and $q$ are required.  The order of the multiplicative sub-group (modulo $pq$) is given
+as $\phi(pq)$ or $(p - 1)(q - 1)$.  The decryption exponent $d$ is found as $de \equiv 1\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod } \phi(pq))$.  If either $p$ or $q$ is composite the value of $d$ will be incorrect and the user
+will not be able to sign or decrypt messages at all.  Suppose $p$ was prime and $q$ was composite this is just a variation of
+the multi-prime RSA.  Suppose $q = rs$ for two primes $r$ and $s$ then $\phi(pq) = (p - 1)(r - 1)(s - 1)$ which clearly is
+not equal to $(p - 1)(rs - 1)$.
+
+These are not technically part of the LibTomMath library but this is the best place to document them.
+To test if a \textit{mp\_int} is prime call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int is_prime(mp_int *N, int *result);
+\end{verbatim}
+This puts a one in \textit{result} if the number is probably prime, otherwise it places a zero in it.  It is assumed that if
+it returns an error that the value in \textit{result} is undefined.  To make
+a random prime call:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rand_prime(       mp_int *N,
+               unsigned long len,
+                  prng_state *prng,
+                         int  wprng);
+\end{verbatim}
+Where \textit{len} is the size of the prime in bytes ($2 \le len \le 256$).  You can set \textit{len} to the negative size you want
+to get a prime of the form $p \equiv 3\mbox{ }(\mbox{mod } 4)$.  So if you want a 1024-bit prime of this sort pass
+\textit{len = -128} to the function.  Upon success it will return {\bf CRYPT\_OK} and \textit{N} will contain an integer which
+is very likely prime.
+
+\mysection{Random MPI Generation}
+\index{Random MPI Generation}
+
+Several Public Key Cryptography algorithms require random MPI's for operations like signature generation.
+The library provides two API functions to generate random MPI's which allow the utilisation of a user-defined PRNG to aquire the random data.
+
+\index{rand\_bn\_bits()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rand_bn_bits(       void *N,
+                         int bits,
+                  prng_state *prng,
+                         int wprng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This sets \textit{N} to a \textit{bits}-long random MPI.
+
+\index{rand\_bn\_upto()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int rand_bn_upto(       void *N,
+                        void *limit,
+                  prng_state *prng,
+                         int wprng);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This ensures that \textit{N} is set to a random MPI in the range $1 \le N < limit$.
+
+
+\mysection{Helper functions}
+
+\subsection{Zero'ing data}
+
+As widely know optimizing-compilers are sometimes allowed to remove an invocation of \textit{memset(out, 0, outlen)}, which could result
+in sensitive data beeing not zero'ed out. Therefore LibTomCrypt implements a variant of this routine which won't be optimized-away.
+
+\index{zeromem()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+void zeromem(volatile void *out, size_t outlen);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This zero's the buffer \textit{out} of size \textit{outlen}.
+
+\subsection{Constant-time memory compare}
+
+Some symmetric-key cryptographic operation-modes are vulnerable to timing attacks in case non-contant-time memory comparison functions
+are used to compare results. Therefore LibTomCrypt implements a constant-time memory compare function.
+
+\index{mem\_neq()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int mem_neq(const void *a, const void *b, size_t len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will compare the buffer \textit{a} against the buffer \textit{b} for \textit{len} bytes.
+The return value is either \textit{0} when the content of \textit{a} and \textit{b} is equal or \textit{1} when it differs.
+
+\subsection{Radix to binary conversion}
+
+All public-key cryptographic algorithms provide a way to import and/or export their key parameters in binary format.
+In order to be able to import keys stored in different formats, e.g. hexadecimal strings, the \textit{radix\_to\_bin()} function is provided.
+
+\index{radix\_to\_bin()}
+\begin{verbatim}
+int radix_to_bin(const void *in, int radix, void *out, unsigned long *len);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will convert the MPI \textit{in} of radix \textit{radix} to the buffer pointed to by \textit{out}.
+The field \textit{len} is a pointer to the length of the buffer on input and the length stored on output.
+
+In case you don't know the length of the buffer you can use \textit{radix\_to\_bin()} to determine the length for you.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+#include <tomcrypt.h>
+
+int main(void)
+{
+   const char *mpi = "AABBCCDD";
+   unsigned long l = 0;
+   void* buf;
+   int ret;
+   ltc_mp = ltm_desc;
+
+   if (radix_to_bin(mpi, 16, NULL, &l) != CRYPT_BUFFER_OVERFLOW)
+      return EXIT_FAILURE;
+   buf = malloc(l);
+
+   ret = EXIT_SUCCESS;
+   if (radix_to_bin(mpi, 16, buf, &l) != CRYPT_OK)
+      ret = EXIT_FAILURE;
+
+   free(buf);
+   return ret;
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\mysection{Dynamic Language Support}
+\index{Dynamic Language Support}
+Various LibTomCrypt functions require that their callers define a struct
+(or a union) and provide a pointer to it, or allocate sufficient memory and
+provide its pointer.  Programs written in C or C++ can obtain the necessary
+information by simply including the appropriate header files, but dynamic
+languages like Python don't understand C header files, and without assistance,
+have no way to know how much memory to allocate.  A similar story can be told
+for certain LTC constant values.
+
+LTC's Dynamic Language Support provides functions that return the size of
+a named struct or union, the value of a named constant, a list of all sizes
+supported, and a list of all named constants supported.  Two additional
+functions can initialize LTM and TFM.
+
+To get the size of a named struct or union:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int crypt_get_size(  const char *namein,
+                   unsigned int *sizeout);
+\end{verbatim}
+$namein$ is spelled exactly as found in the C header files.  This function will
+return -1 if $namein$ is not found.
+
+To get the value of a named constant:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int crypt_get_constant(const char *namein,
+                              int *valueout);
+\end{verbatim}
+$namein$ is spelled exactly as found in the C header files.  Again, -1 is
+returned if $namein$ is not found.
+
+To get the names of all the supported structs, unions and constants:
+\begin{verbatim}
+int crypt_list_all_sizes(        char *names_list,
+                         unsigned int *names_list_size);
+
+int crypt_list_all_constants(        char *names_list,
+                             unsigned int *names_list_size);
+\end{verbatim}
+You may want to call these functions twice, first to get the amount
+of memory to be allocated for the $names_list$, and a final time to
+actually populate $names_list$.  If $names_list$ is NULL,
+$names_list_size$ will be the minimum size needed to receive the
+complete $names_list$.  If $names_list$ is NOT NULL, $names_list$ must
+be a pointer to sufficient memory into which the $names_list$ will be
+written.  Also, the value in $names_list_size$ sets the upper bound of
+the number of characters to be written.  A -1 return value signifies
+insufficient space.
+
+The format of the $names_list$ string is a series of $name,value$ pairs
+where each name and value is separated by a comma, the pairs are separated
+by newlines, and the list is null terminated.
+
+Calling either of these functions will initialize the respective
+math library.
+\begin{verbatim}
+void init_LTM(void);
+void init_TFM(void);
+void init_GMP(void);
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Here is a Python program demonstrating how to call various LTC dynamic
+language support functions.
+\begin{verbatim}
+from ctypes import *
+
+# load the OSX shared/dynamic library
+LIB = CDLL('libtomcrypt.dylib')
+
+# - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+# print info about this library
+
+little = c_int()        # assume False is big
+word32 = c_int()        # assume False is 64-bit
+
+LIB.crypt_get_constant('ENDIAN_LITTLE', byref(little))
+LIB.crypt_get_constant('ENDIAN_32BITWORD', byref(word32))
+
+print('this lib was compiled for a %s endian %d-bit processor'
+      % ('little' if little else 'big', 32 if word32 else 64))
+
+# - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+# print the size of the struct named "sha256_state"
+
+struct_size = c_int()
+
+# don't forget to add the '_struct' or '_union' suffix
+LIB.crypt_get_size('sha256_state_struct', byref(struct_size))
+
+print('allocate %d bytes for sha256_state' % struct_size.value)
+
+# - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+# print a list of all supported named constants
+
+list_size = c_int()
+
+# call with NULL to calc the min size needed for the list
+LIB.crypt_list_all_constants(None, byref(list_size))
+
+# allocate required space
+names_list = c_buffer(list_size.value)
+
+# call again providing a pointer to where to write the list
+LIB.crypt_list_all_constants(names_list, byref(list_size))
+
+print(names_list.value)
+
+# - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+# print a list of all supported named structs and unions
+
+list_size = c_int()
+
+# call with NULL to calc the min size needed for the list
+LIB.crypt_list_all_sizes(None, byref(list_size))
+
+# allocate required space
+names_list = c_buffer(list_size.value)
+
+# call again providing a pointer to where to write the list
+LIB.crypt_list_all_sizes(names_list, byref(list_size))
+
+print(names_list.value)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\chapter{Programming Guidelines}
+
+\mysection{Secure Pseudo Random Number Generators}
+Probably the single most vulnerable point of any cryptosystem is the PRNG.  Without one, generating and protecting secrets
+would be impossible.  The requirement that one be setup correctly is vitally important, and to address this point the library
+does provide two RNG sources that will address the largest amount of end users as possible.  The \textit{sprng} PRNG provides an easy to
+access source of entropy for any application on a UNIX (and the like) or Windows computer.
+
+However, when the end user is not on one of these platforms, the application developer must address the issue of finding
+entropy.  This manual is not designed to be a text on cryptography.  I would just like to highlight that when you design
+a cryptosystem make sure the first problem you solve is getting a fresh source of entropy.
+
+\mysection{Preventing Trivial Errors}
+Two simple ways to prevent trivial errors is to prevent overflows, and to check the return values.  All of the functions
+which output variable length strings will require you to pass the length of the destination.  If the size of your output
+buffer is smaller than the output it will report an error.  Therefore, make sure the size you pass is correct!
+
+Also, virtually all of the functions return an error code or {\bf CRYPT\_OK}.  You should detect all errors, as simple
+typos can cause algorithms to fail to work as desired.
+
+\mysection{Registering Your Algorithms}
+To avoid linking and other run--time errors it is important to register the ciphers, hashes and PRNGs you intend to use
+before you try to use them.  This includes any function which would use an algorithm indirectly through a descriptor table.
+
+A neat bonus to the registry system is that you can add external algorithms that are not part of the library without
+having to hack the library.  For example, suppose you have a hardware specific PRNG on your system.  You could easily
+write the few functions required plus a descriptor.  After registering your PRNG, all of the library functions that
+need a PRNG can instantly take advantage of it.  The same applies for ciphers, hashes, and bignum math routines.
+
+\mysection{Key Sizes}
+
+\subsection{Symmetric Ciphers}
+For symmetric ciphers, use as large as of a key as possible.  For the most part \textit{bits are cheap} so using a 256--bit key
+is not a hard thing to do.  As a good rule of thumb do not use a key smaller than 128 bits.
+
+\subsection{Asymmetric Ciphers}
+The following chart gives the work factor for solving a DH/RSA public key using the NFS.  The work factor for a key of order
+$n$ is estimated to be
+\begin{equation}
+e^{1.923 \cdot ln(n)^{1 \over 3} \cdot ln(ln(n))^{2 \over 3}}
+\end{equation}
+
+Note that $n$ is not the bit-length but the magnitude.  For example, for a 1024-bit key $n = 2^{1024}$.  The work required
+is:
+\begin{figure}[H]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
+    \hline RSA/DH Key Size (bits) & Work Factor ($log_2$) \\
+    \hline 512 & 63.92 \\
+    \hline 768 & 76.50 \\
+    \hline 1024 & 86.76 \\
+    \hline 1536 & 103.37 \\
+    \hline 2048 & 116.88 \\
+    \hline 2560 & 128.47 \\
+    \hline 3072 & 138.73 \\
+    \hline 4096 & 156.49 \\
+    \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\caption{RSA/DH Key Strength}
+\end{figure}
+
+The work factor for ECC keys is much higher since the best attack is still fully exponential.  Given a key of magnitude
+$n$ it requires $\sqrt n$ work.  The following table summarizes the work required:
+\begin{figure}[H]
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
+    \hline ECC Key Size (bits) & Work Factor ($log_2$) \\
+    \hline 112 & 56 \\
+    \hline 128 & 64 \\
+    \hline 160 & 80 \\
+    \hline 192 & 96  \\
+    \hline 224 & 112 \\
+    \hline 256 & 128 \\
+    \hline 384 & 192 \\
+    \hline 521 & 260.5 \\
+    \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\caption{ECC Key Strength}
+\end{figure}
+
+Using the above tables the following suggestions for key sizes seems appropriate:
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|}
+    \hline Security Goal & RSA/DH Key Size (bits) & ECC Key Size (bits) \\
+    \hline Near term   & 1024 & 160 \\
+    \hline Short term  & 1536 & 192 \\
+    \hline Long Term   & 2560 & 384 \\
+    \hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+
+\mysection{Thread Safety}
+The library is not fully thread safe but several simple precautions can be taken to avoid any problems.  The registry functions
+such as register\_cipher() are not thread safe no matter what you do.  It is best to call them from your programs initialization
+code before threads are initiated.
+
+The rest of the code uses state variables you must pass it such as hash\_state, hmac\_state, etc.  This means that if each
+thread has its own state variables then they will not affect each other, and are fully thread safe.  This is fairly simple with symmetric ciphers
+and hashes.
+
+\index{LTC\_PTHREAD}
+The only sticky issue is a shared PRNG which can be alleviated with the careful use of mutex devices.  Defining LTC\_PTHREAD for instance, enables
+pthreads based mutex locking in various routines such as the Yarrow and Fortuna PRNGs, the fixed point ECC multiplier, and other routines.
+
+\chapter{Configuring and Building the Library}
+\mysection{Introduction}
+The library is fairly flexible about how it can be built, used, and generally distributed.  Additions are being made with
+each new release that will make the library even more flexible.  Each of the classes of functions can be disabled during
+the build process to make a smaller library.  This is particularly useful for shared libraries.
+
+As of v1.06 of the library, the build process has been moved to two steps for the typical LibTomCrypt application.  This is because
+LibTomCrypt no longer provides a math API on its own and relies on third party libraries (such as LibTomMath, GnuMP, or TomsFastMath).
+
+The build process now consists of installing a math library first, and then building and installing LibTomCrypt with a math library
+configured.  Note that LibTomCrypt can be built with no internal math descriptors.  This means that one must be provided at either
+build, or run time for the application.  LibTomCrypt comes with three math descriptors that provide a standard interface to math
+libraries.
+
+\mysection{Makefile variables}
+
+All GNU driven makefiles (including the makefile for ICC) use a set of common variables to control the build and install process.  Most of the
+settings can be overwritten from the command line which makes custom installation a breeze.
+
+\subsection{MAKE, CC, AR and CROSS\_COMPILE}
+\index{MAKE} \index{CC} \index{AR} \index{CROSS\_COMPILE}
+The MAKE, CC and AR flags can all be overwritten.  They default to \textit{make}, \textit{\$CC} and \textit{\$AR} respectively.
+Changing MAKE allows you to change what program will be invoked to handle sub--directories. For example, this
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+gmake install MAKE=gmake
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{flushleft} will build and install the libraries with the \textit{gmake} tool.  Similarly, \end{flushleft}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make CC=arm-gcc AR=arm-ar
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{flushleft} will build the library using \textit{arm--gcc} as the compiler and \textit{arm--ar} as the archiver. \end{flushleft}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make CROSS_COMPILE=arm-none-eabi-
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{flushleft} will build the library using the \textit{arm--none--eabi--} prefix'ed toolchain. \end{flushleft}
+
+\subsection{IGNORE\_SPEED and LTC\_DEBUG}
+\index{IGNORE\_SPEED} \index{LTC\_DEBUG}
+When \textbf{IGNORE\_SPEED} has been defined the default optimization flags for CFLAGS will be disabled which allows the developer to specify new
+CFLAGS on the command line.  E.g. to add debugging
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make IGNORE_SPEED=1 CFLAGS="-g3"
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will turn off optimizations and add \textit{-g3} to the CFLAGS which enables debugging.
+
+Alternatively one can define \textbf{LTC\_DEBUG} instead, which additionally defines \textit{LTC\_NO\_ASM} and enables debug output on test failures.
+
+Defining \textit{LTC\_DEBUG=2} has the effect to enable verbose output in some of the tests.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make LTC_DEBUG=2
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\begin{flushleft} will build the library without compiler-optimisation or architecture specific code and will enable debugging
+and verbose debug output. \end{flushleft}
+
+\subsection{LIBNAME}
+\index{LIBNAME}
+\textbf{LIBNAME} is the name of the output library (archive) to create.  It defaults to \textit{libtomcrypt.a} for static builds and \textit{libtomcrypt.la} for
+shared.
+On installation of the shared library the appropriately versioned \textit{libtomcrypt.so}, \textit{libtomcrypt.so.0} etc. will be created by \textit{libtool}.
+
+\subsection{Installation Directories}
+\index{DESTDIR} \index{PREFIX} \index{LIBPATH} \index{INCPATH} \index{DATAPATH} \index{BINPATH}
+\textbf{DESTDIR} is the location where the output will be stored.  It default to an empty string.
+\textbf{PREFIX} is the prefix for the installation directories.  It defaults to \textit{/usr/local}.
+\textbf{LIBPATH} is the location of the library directory which defaults to \textit{\$PREFIX/lib}.
+\textbf{INCPATH} is the location of the header file directory which defaults to \textit{\$PREFIX/include}.
+\textbf{DATAPATH} is the location of the data (documentation) directory which defaults to \textit{\$PREFIX/share/doc/libtomcrypt/pdf}.
+\textbf{BINPATH} is the location of the binary file directory which defaults to \textit{\$PREFIX/bin}.
+
+They allow to configure the installation locations of the libary.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make PREFIX=/home/tom/project DATAPATH=/home/tom/project/docs install
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will build the library and install it to the directories under \textit{/home/tom/project/}.  e.g.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+/home/tom/project/:
+total 1
+drwxr-xr-x  2 tom users  80 Jul 30 16:02 docs
+drwxr-xr-x  2 tom users 528 Jul 30 16:02 include
+drwxr-xr-x  2 tom users  80 Jul 30 16:02 lib
+
+/home/tom/project/docs:
+total 452
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 459009 Jul 30 16:02 crypt.pdf
+
+/home/tom/project/include:
+total 132
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users  2482 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users   702 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_argchk.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users  2945 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_cfg.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 22763 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_cipher.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users  5174 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_custom.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 11314 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_hash.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 11571 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_mac.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 13614 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_macros.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 14714 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_math.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users   632 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_misc.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 10934 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_pk.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users  2634 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_pkcs.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users  7067 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_prng.h
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users  1467 Jul 30 16:02 tomcrypt_test.h
+
+/home/tom/project/lib:
+total 1073
+-rwxr-xr-x  1 tom users 1096284 Jul 30 16:02 libtomcrypt.a
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+For further information see: \url{https://www.gnu.org/prep/standards/html_node/DESTDIR.html}
+and \url{https://www.freebsd.org/doc/en/books/porters-handbook/porting-prefix.html}.
+
+\mysection{Extra libraries}
+\index{EXTRALIBS}
+\textbf{EXTRALIBS} specifies any extra libraries required to link the test programs and shared libraries.  They are specified in the notation
+that GCC expects for global archives.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make install test timing CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC -DUSE_TFM" EXTRALIBS=-ltfm
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will install the library using the TomsFastMath library and link the \textit{libtfm.a} library out of the default library search path.  The two
+defines are explained below.  You can specify multiple archives (say if you want to support two math libraries, or add on additional code) to
+the \textbf{EXTRALIBS} variable by separating them by a space.
+
+Note that \textbf{EXTRALIBS} is not required if you are only making and installing the static library but none of the test programs.
+
+\mysection{Building a Static Library}
+
+Building a static library is fairly trivial as it only requires one invocation of the GNU make command.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make install CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC"
+\end{verbatim}
+
+That will build LibTomCrypt (including the TomsFastMath descriptor), and install it in the default locations indicated previously.  You can enable
+the built--in LibTomMath descriptor as well (or in place of the TomsFastMath descriptor).  Similarly, you can build the library with no built--in
+math descriptors.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make install
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In this case, no math descriptors are present in the library and they will have to be made available at build or run time before you can use any of the
+public key functions.
+
+Note that even if you include the built--in descriptors you must link against the source library as well.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+gcc -DTFM_DESC myprogram.c -ltomcrypt -ltfm -o myprogram
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will compile \textit{myprogram} and link it against the LibTomCrypt library as well as TomsFastMath (which must have been previously installed).  Note that
+we define \textbf{TFM\_DESC} for compilation.  This is so that the TFM descriptor symbol will be defined for the client application to make use of without
+giving warnings.
+
+\mysection{Building a Shared Library}
+
+LibTomCrypt can also be built as a shared library through the \textit{makefile.shared} make script.  It is similar to use as the static script except
+that you \textbf{must} specify the \textbf{EXTRALIBS} variable at install time.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+make -f makefile.shared install CFLAGS="-DTFM_DESC" EXTRALIBS=-ltfm
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This will build and install the library and link the shared object against the TomsFastMath library (which must be installed as a shared object as well).  The
+shared build process requires libtool to be installed.
+
+\mysection{Header Configuration}
+The file \textit{tomcrypt\_cfg.h} is what lets you control various high level macros which control the behaviour of the library.  Build options are also
+stored in \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} which allow the enabling and disabling of various algorithms.
+
+\subsubsection{ARGTYPE}
+This lets you control how the LTC\_ARGCHK macro will behave.  The macro is used to check pointers inside the functions against
+NULL.  There are four settings for ARGTYPE.  When set to 0, it will have the default behaviour of printing a message to
+stderr and raising a SIGABRT signal.  This is provided so all platforms that use LibTomCrypt can have an error that functions
+similarly.  When set to 1, it will simply pass on to the assert() macro.  When set to 2, the macro will display the error to
+stderr then return execution to the caller.  This could lead to a segmentation fault (e.g. when a pointer is \textbf{NULL}) but is useful
+if you handle signals on your own.  When set to 3, it will resolve to a empty macro and no error checking will be performed.  Finally, when set
+to 4, it will return CRYPT\_INVALID\_ARG to the caller.
+
+\subsubsection{Endianness}
+There are five macros related to endianness issues.  For little endian platforms define, \textbf{ENDIAN\_LITTLE}.  For big endian
+platforms define \textbf{ENDIAN\_BIG}.  Similarly when the default word size of an \textit{unsigned long} is 32-bits define \textbf{ENDIAN\_32BITWORD}
+or define \textbf{ENDIAN\_64BITWORD} when its 64-bits.  If you do not define any of them the library will automatically use \textbf{ENDIAN\_NEUTRAL}
+which will work on all platforms.
+
+Currently LibTomCrypt will detect x86-32, x86-64, MIPS R5900, SPARC and SPARC64 running GCC as well as x86-32 running MSVC.
+
+\mysection{Customisation}
+There are also options you can specify from the \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} header file.
+
+\subsection{X memory routines}
+\index{XMALLOC}\index{XREALLOC}\index{XCALLOC}\index{XFREE}\index{XMEMSET}\index{XMEMCPY}\index{XMEMMOVE}\index{XMEMCMP}\index{XSTRCMP}
+At the top of tomcrypt\_custom.h are a series of macros denoted as XMALLOC, XCALLOC, XREALLOC, XFREE, and so on.  They resolve to
+the name of the respective functions from the standard C library by default.  This lets you substitute in your own memory routines.
+If you substitute in your own functions they must behave like the standard C library functions in terms of what they expect as input and
+output.
+
+These macros are handy for working with platforms which do not have a standard C library.
+For instance, the OLPC\footnote{See \url{http://dev.laptop.org/git?p=bios-crypto;a=summary}}
+bios code uses these macros to redirect to very compact heap and string operations.
+
+\subsection{X clock routines}
+The rng\_get\_bytes() function can call a function that requires the clock() function.  These macros let you override
+the default clock() used with a replacement.  By default the standard C library clock() function is used.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_NO\_FILE}
+During the build if LTC\_NO\_FILE is defined then any function in the library that uses file I/O will not call the file I/O
+functions and instead simply return CRYPT\_NOP.  This should help resolve any linker errors stemming from a lack of
+file I/O on embedded platforms.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_CLEAN\_STACK}
+When this functions is defined the functions that store key material on the stack will clean up afterwards.
+Assumes that you have no memory paging with the stack.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_TEST}
+When this has been defined the various self--test functions (for ciphers, hashes, prngs, etc) are included in the build.  This is the default configuration.
+If LTC\_NO\_TEST has been defined, the testing routines will be compacted and only return CRYPT\_NOP.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_NO\_FAST}
+When this has been defined the library will not use faster word oriented operations.  By default, they are only enabled for platforms
+which can be auto-detected.  This macro ensures that they are never enabled.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_FAST}
+This mode (auto-detected with x86\_32, x86\_64 platforms with GCC or CLANG) configures various routines such as ctr\_encrypt() or
+cbc\_encrypt() that it can safely XOR multiple octets in one step by using a larger data type.  This has the benefit of
+cutting down the overhead of the respective functions.
+
+This mode does have one downside.  It can cause unaligned reads from memory if you are not careful with the functions.  This is why
+it has been enabled by default only for the x86 class of processors where unaligned accesses are allowed.  Technically LTC\_FAST
+is not \textit{portable} since unaligned accesses are not covered by the ISO C specifications.
+
+In practice however, you can use it on pretty much any platform (even MIPS) with care.
+
+By design the \textit{fast} mode functions won't get unaligned on their own.  For instance, if you call ctr\_encrypt() right after calling
+ctr\_start() and all the inputs you gave are aligned than ctr\_encrypt() will perform aligned memory operations only.  However, if you
+call ctr\_encrypt() with an odd amount of plaintext then call it again the CTR pad (the IV) will be partially used.  This will
+cause the ctr routine to first use up the remaining pad bytes.  Then if there are enough plaintext bytes left it will use
+whole word XOR operations.  These operations will be unaligned.
+
+The simplest precaution is to make sure you process all data in power of two blocks and handle \textit{remainder} at the end.  e.g. If you are
+CTR'ing a long stream process it in blocks of (say) four kilobytes and handle any remaining incomplete blocks at the end of the stream.
+
+\index{LTC\_FAST\_TYPE}
+If you do plan on using the \textit{LTC\_FAST} mode, a \textit{LTC\_FAST\_TYPE} type which resolves to an optimal sized
+data type you can perform integer operations with is required.  For the auto-detected platforms this type will be defined automatically.  Ideally it should be four or eight bytes since it must properly divide the size
+of your block cipher (e.g. 16 bytes for AES).  This means sadly if you're on a platform with 57--bit words (or something) you can't
+use this mode.  So sad.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_NO\_ASM}
+When this has been defined the library will not use any inline assembler.  Only a few platforms support assembler inlines but various versions of ICC and GCC
+cannot handle all of the assembler functions.
+
+\subsection{Symmetric Ciphers, One-way Hashes, PRNGS and Public Key Functions}
+There are a plethora of macros for the ciphers, hashes, PRNGs and public key functions which are fairly
+self-explanatory.  When they are defined the functionality is included otherwise it is not.  There are some
+dependency issues which are noted in the file.  For instance, Yarrow requires CTR chaining mode, a block
+cipher and a hash function.
+
+Also see technical note number five for more details.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_EASY}
+When defined the library is configured to build fewer algorithms and modes.  Mostly it sticks to NIST and ANSI approved algorithms.  See
+the header file \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} for more details.  It is meant to provide literally an easy method of trimming the library
+build to the most minimum of useful functionality.
+
+\subsection{TWOFISH\_SMALL and TWOFISH\_TABLES}
+Twofish is a 128-bit symmetric block cipher that is provided within the library.  The cipher itself is flexible enough
+to allow some trade-offs in the implementation.  When TWOFISH\_SMALL is defined the scheduled symmetric key for Twofish
+requires only 200 bytes of memory.  This is achieved by not pre-computing the substitution boxes.  Having this
+defined will also greatly slow down the cipher.  When this macro is not defined Twofish will pre-compute the
+tables at a cost of 4KB of memory.  The cipher will be much faster as a result.
+
+When TWOFISH\_TABLES is defined the cipher will use pre-computed (and fixed in code) tables required to work.  This is
+useful when TWOFISH\_SMALL is defined as the table values are computed on the fly.  When this is defined the code size
+will increase by approximately 500 bytes.  If this is defined but TWOFISH\_SMALL is not the cipher will still work but
+it will not speed up the encryption or decryption functions.
+
+\subsection{GCM\_TABLES}
+When defined GCM will use a 64KB table (per GCM state) which will greatly speed up the per--packet latency.
+It also increases the initialization time and is not suitable when you are going to use a key a few times only.
+
+\subsection{GCM\_TABLES\_SSE2}
+\index{SSE2}
+When defined GCM will use the SSE2 instructions to perform the $GF(2^x)$ multiply using 16 128--bit XOR operations.  It shaves a few cycles per byte
+of GCM output on both the AMD64 and Intel Pentium 4 platforms.  Requires GCC and an SSE2 equipped platform.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_SMALL\_CODE}
+When this is defined some of the code such as the Rijndael and SAFER+ ciphers are replaced with smaller code variants.
+These variants are slower but can save quite a bit of code space.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_PTHREAD}
+When this is activated all of the descriptor table functions will use pthread locking to ensure thread safe updates to the tables.  Note that
+it doesn't prevent a thread that is passively using a table from being messed up by another thread that updates the table.
+
+Generally the rule of thumb is to setup the tables once at startup and then leave them be.  This added build flag simply makes updating
+the tables safer.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_ECC\_TIMING\_RESISTANT}
+When this has been defined the ECC point multiplier (built--in to the library) will use a timing resistant point multiplication
+algorithm which prevents leaking key bits of the private key (scalar).  It is a slower algorithm but useful for situations
+where timing side channels pose a significant threat.
+
+This is enabled by default and can be disabled by defining \textbf{LTC\_NO\_ECC\_TIMING\_RESISTANT}.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_RSA\_BLINDING}
+When this has been defined the RSA modular exponentiation will use a blinding algorithm to improve timing resistance.
+
+This is enabled by default and can be disabled by defining \textbf{LTC\_NO\_RSA\_BLINDING}.
+
+\subsection{LTC\_RSA\_CRT\_HARDENING}
+When this has been defined the RSA modular exponentiation will do some sanity checks regarding the CRT parameters and the operations' results.
+
+This is enabled by default and can be disabled by defining \textbf{LTC\_NO\_RSA\_CRT\_HARDENING}.
+
+\subsection{Math Descriptors}
+The library comes with three math descriptors that allow you to interface the public key cryptography API to freely available math
+libraries.  When \textbf{GMP\_DESC}, \textbf{LTM\_DESC}, or \textbf{TFM\_DESC} are defined
+descriptors for the respective library are built and included in the library as \textit{gmp\_desc}, \textit{ltm\_desc}, or \textit{tfm\_desc} respectively.
+
+In the test demos that use the libraries the additional flags \textbf{USE\_GMP}, \textbf{USE\_LTM}, and \textbf{USE\_TFM} can be defined
+to tell the program which library to use.  Only one of the USE flags can be defined at once.
+
+\index{GMP\_DESC} \index{USE\_GMP} \index{LTM\_DESC} \index{TFM\_DESC} \index{USE\_LTM} \index{USE\_TFM}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+make -f makefile.shared install timing CFLAGS="-DGMP_DESC -DLTM_DESC -DTFM_DESC -DUSE_TFM" \
+EXTRALIBS="-lgmp -ltommath -ltfm"
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+That will build and install the library with all descriptors (and link against all), but only use TomsFastMath in the timing demo.
+
+\chapter{Optimizations}
+\mysection{Introduction}
+The entire API was designed with plug and play in mind at the low level.  That is you can swap out any cipher, hash, PRNG or bignum library and the dependent API will not
+require updating.  This has the nice benefit that one can add ciphers (etc.) not have to re--write portions of the API.  For the most part, LibTomCrypt has also been written
+to be highly portable and easy to build out of the box on pretty much any platform.  As such there are no assembler inlines throughout the code, I make no assumptions
+about the platform, etc...
+
+That works well for most cases but there are times where performance is of the essence.  This API allows optimized routines to be dropped in--place of the existing
+portable routines.  For instance, hand optimized assembler versions of AES could be provided.  Any existing function that uses the cipher could automatically use
+the optimized code without re--writing.  This also paves the way for hardware drivers that can access hardware accelerated cryptographic devices.
+
+At the heart of this flexibility is the \textit{descriptor} system.  A descriptor is essentially just a C \textit{struct} which describes the algorithm and provides pointers
+to functions that do the required work.  For a given class of operation (e.g. cipher, hash, prng, bignum) the functions of a descriptor have identical prototypes which makes
+development simple.  In most dependent routines all an end developer has to do is register\_XXX() the descriptor and they are set.
+
+\mysection{Ciphers}
+The ciphers in LibTomCrypt are accessed through the ltc\_cipher\_descriptor structure.
+
+\label{sec:cipherdesc}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+struct ltc_cipher_descriptor {
+   /** name of cipher */
+   char *name;
+
+   /** internal ID */
+   unsigned char ID;
+
+   /** min keysize (octets) */
+   int  min_key_length,
+
+   /** max keysize (octets) */
+        max_key_length,
+
+   /** block size (octets) */
+        block_length,
+
+   /** default number of rounds */
+        default_rounds;
+
+   /** Setup the cipher
+      @param key         The input symmetric key
+      @param keylen      The length of the input key (octets)
+      @param num_rounds  The requested number of rounds (0==default)
+      @param skey        [out] The destination of the scheduled key
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int  (*setup)(const unsigned char *key,
+                                 int  keylen,
+                                 int  num_rounds,
+                       symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Encrypt a block
+      @param pt      The plaintext
+      @param ct      [out] The ciphertext
+      @param skey    The scheduled key
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*ecb_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt,
+                            unsigned char *ct,
+                            symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Decrypt a block
+      @param ct      The ciphertext
+      @param pt      [out] The plaintext
+      @param skey    The scheduled key
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*ecb_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct,
+                            unsigned char *pt,
+                            symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Test the block cipher
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful,
+               CRYPT_NOP if self-testing has been disabled
+   */
+   int (*test)(void);
+
+   /** Terminate the context
+      @param skey    The scheduled key
+   */
+   void (*done)(symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Determine a key size
+       @param keysize    [in/out] The size of the key desired
+                                  The suggested size
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int  (*keysize)(int *keysize);
+
+/** Accelerators **/
+   /** Accelerated ECB encryption
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_ecb_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated ECB decryption
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_ecb_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated CBC encryption
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param IV      The initial value (input/output)
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_cbc_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  unsigned char *IV,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated CBC decryption
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param IV      The initial value (input/output)
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_cbc_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  unsigned char *IV,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated CTR encryption
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param IV      The initial value (input/output)
+       @param mode    little or big endian counter (mode=0 or mode=1)
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_ctr_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  unsigned char *IV,
+                                            int  mode,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated LRW
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param IV      The initial value (input/output)
+       @param tweak   The LRW tweak
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_lrw_encrypt)(const unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  unsigned char *IV,
+                            const unsigned char *tweak,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated LRW
+       @param ct      Ciphertext
+       @param pt      Plaintext
+       @param blocks  The number of complete blocks to process
+       @param IV      The initial value (input/output)
+       @param tweak   The LRW tweak
+       @param skey    The scheduled key context
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_lrw_decrypt)(const unsigned char *ct,
+                                  unsigned char *pt,
+                                  unsigned long  blocks,
+                                  unsigned char *IV,
+                            const unsigned char *tweak,
+                                  symmetric_key *skey);
+
+   /** Accelerated CCM packet (one-shot)
+       @param key        The secret key to use
+       @param keylen     The length of the secret key (octets)
+       @param uskey      A previously scheduled key [can be NULL]
+       @param nonce      The session nonce [use once]
+       @param noncelen   The length of the nonce
+       @param header     The header for the session
+       @param headerlen  The length of the header (octets)
+       @param pt         [out] The plaintext
+       @param ptlen      The length of the plaintext (octets)
+       @param ct         [out] The ciphertext
+       @param tag        [out] The destination tag
+       @param taglen     [in/out] The max size and resulting size
+                                  of the authentication tag
+       @param direction  Encrypt or Decrypt direction (0 or 1)
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+   */
+   int (*accel_ccm_memory)(
+       const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+       symmetric_key       *uskey,
+       const unsigned char *nonce,  unsigned long noncelen,
+       const unsigned char *header, unsigned long headerlen,
+             unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+             unsigned char *ct,
+             unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long *taglen,
+                       int  direction);
+
+   /** Accelerated GCM packet (one shot)
+       @param key        The secret key
+       @param keylen     The length of the secret key
+       @param IV         The initialization vector
+       @param IVlen      The length of the initialization vector
+       @param adata      The additional authentication data (header)
+       @param adatalen   The length of the adata
+       @param pt         The plaintext
+       @param ptlen      The length of the plaintext/ciphertext
+       @param ct         The ciphertext
+       @param tag        [out] The MAC tag
+       @param taglen     [in/out] The MAC tag length
+       @param direction  Encrypt or Decrypt mode (GCM_ENCRYPT or GCM_DECRYPT)
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*accel_gcm_memory)(
+       const unsigned char *key,    unsigned long keylen,
+       const unsigned char *IV,     unsigned long IVlen,
+       const unsigned char *adata,  unsigned long adatalen,
+             unsigned char *pt,     unsigned long ptlen,
+             unsigned char *ct,
+             unsigned char *tag,    unsigned long *taglen,
+                       int direction);
+
+   /** Accelerated one shot OMAC
+       @param key            The secret key
+       @param keylen         The key length (octets)
+       @param in             The message
+       @param inlen          Length of message (octets)
+       @param out            [out] Destination for tag
+       @param outlen         [in/out] Initial and final size of out
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*omac_memory)(
+       const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen,
+       const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long inlen,
+             unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+
+   /** Accelerated one shot XCBC
+       @param key            The secret key
+       @param keylen         The key length (octets)
+       @param in             The message
+       @param inlen          Length of message (octets)
+       @param out            [out] Destination for tag
+       @param outlen         [in/out] Initial and final size of out
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*xcbc_memory)(
+       const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen,
+       const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long inlen,
+             unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+
+   /** Accelerated one shot F9
+       @param key            The secret key
+       @param keylen         The key length (octets)
+       @param in             The message
+       @param inlen          Length of message (octets)
+       @param out            [out] Destination for tag
+       @param outlen         [in/out] Initial and final size of out
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+       @remark Requires manual padding
+   */
+   int (*f9_memory)(
+       const unsigned char *key, unsigned long keylen,
+       const unsigned char *in,  unsigned long inlen,
+             unsigned char *out, unsigned long *outlen);
+};
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\subsection{Name}
+\index{find\_cipher()}
+The \textit{name} parameter specifies the name of the cipher.  This is what a developer would pass to find\_cipher() to find the cipher in the descriptor
+tables.
+
+\subsection{Internal ID}
+This is a single byte Internal ID you can use to distinguish ciphers from each other.
+
+\subsection{Key Lengths}
+The minimum key length is \textit{min\_key\_length} and is measured in octets.  Similarly the maximum key length is \textit{max\_key\_length}.  They can be equal
+and both must valid key sizes for the cipher.  Values in between are not assumed to be valid though they may be.
+
+\subsection{Block Length}
+The size of the ciphers plaintext or ciphertext is \textit{block\_length} and is measured in octets.
+
+\subsection{Rounds}
+Some ciphers allow different number of rounds to be used.  Usually you just use the default.  The default round count is \textit{default\_rounds}.
+
+\subsection{Setup}
+To initialize a cipher (for ECB mode) the function setup() was provided.  It accepts an array of key octets \textit{key} of length \textit{keylen} octets.  The user
+can specify the number of rounds they want through \textit{num\_rounds} where $num\_rounds = 0$ means use the default.  The destination of a scheduled key is stored
+in \textit{skey}.
+
+Inside the \textit{symmetric\_key} union there is a \textit{void *data} which you can use to allocate data if you need a data structure that does not fit with the existing
+ones provided.  Just make sure in your \textit{done()} function that you free the allocated memory.
+
+\subsection{Single block ECB}
+To process a single block in ECB mode the ecb\_encrypt() and ecb\_decrypt() functions were provided.  The plaintext and ciphertext buffers are allowed to overlap so you
+must make sure you do not overwrite the output before you are finished with the input.
+
+\subsection{Testing}
+The test() function is used to self--test the \textit{device}.  It takes no arguments and returns \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} if all is working properly.  You may return
+\textbf{CRYPT\_NOP} to indicate that no testing was performed.
+
+\subsection{Key Sizing}
+Occasionally, a function will want to find a suitable key size to use since the input is oddly sized.  The keysize() function is for this case.  It accepts a
+pointer to an integer which represents the desired size.  The function then has to match it to the exact or a lower key size that is valid for the cipher.  For
+example, if the input is $25$ and $24$ is valid then it stores $24$ back in the pointed to integer.  It must not round up and must return an error if the keysize
+ cannot be mapped to a valid key size for the cipher.
+
+\subsection{Acceleration}
+The next set of functions cover the accelerated functionality of the cipher descriptor.  Any combination of these functions may be set to \textbf{NULL} to indicate
+it is not supported.  In those cases the software defaults are used (using the single ECB block routines).
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated ECB}
+These two functions are meant for cases where a user wants to encrypt (in ECB mode no less) an array of blocks.  These functions are accessed
+through the accel\_ecb\_encrypt and accel\_ecb\_decrypt pointers.  The \textit{blocks} count is the number of complete blocks to process.
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated CBC}
+These two functions are meant for accelerated CBC encryption.  These functions are accessed through the accel\_cbc\_encrypt and accel\_cbc\_decrypt pointers.
+The \textit{blocks} value is the number of complete blocks to process.  The \textit{IV} is the CBC initialization vector.  It is an input upon calling this function and must be
+updated by the function before returning.
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated CTR}
+This function is meant for accelerated CTR encryption.  It is accessible through the accel\_ctr\_encrypt pointer.
+The \textit{blocks} value is the number of complete blocks to process.  The \textit{IV} is the CTR counter vector.  It is an input upon calling this function and must be
+updated by the function before returning.  The \textit{mode} value indicates whether the counter is big (mode = CTR\_COUNTER\_BIG\_ENDIAN) or
+little (mode = CTR\_COUNTER\_LITTLE\_ENDIAN) endian.
+
+This function (and the way it's called) differs from the other two since ctr\_encrypt() allows any size input plaintext.  The accelerator will only be
+called if the following conditions are met.
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+   \item The accelerator is present
+   \item The CTR pad is empty
+   \item The remaining length of the input to process is greater than or equal to the block size.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+The \textit{CTR pad} is empty when a multiple (including zero) blocks of text have been processed.  That is, if you pass in seven bytes to AES--CTR mode you would have to
+pass in a minimum of nine extra bytes before the accelerator could be called.  The CTR accelerator must increment the counter (and store it back into the
+buffer provided) before encrypting it to create the pad.
+
+The accelerator will only be used to encrypt whole blocks.  Partial blocks are always handled in software.
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated LRW}
+These functions are meant for accelerated LRW.  They process blocks of input in lengths of multiples of 16 octets.  They must accept the \textit{IV} and \textit{tweak}
+state variables and updated them prior to returning.  Note that you may want to disable \textbf{LRW\_TABLES} in \textit{tomcrypt\_custom.h} if you intend
+to use accelerators for LRW.
+
+While both encrypt and decrypt accelerators are not required it is suggested as it makes lrw\_setiv() more efficient.
+
+Note that calling lrw\_done() will only invoke the cipher\_descriptor[].done() function on the \textit{symmetric\_key} parameter of the LRW state.  That means
+if your device requires any (LRW specific) resources you should free them in your ciphers() done function.  The simplest way to think of it is to write
+the plugin solely to do LRW with the cipher.  That way cipher\_descriptor[].setup() means to init LRW resources and cipher\_descriptor[].done() means to
+free them.
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated CCM}
+This function is meant for accelerated CCM encryption or decryption.  It processes the entire packet in one call.  You can optimize the work flow somewhat
+by allowing the caller to call the setup() function first to schedule the key if your accelerator cannot do the key schedule on the fly (for instance).  This
+function MUST support both key passing methods.
+
+\begin{center}
+\begin{small}
+\begin{tabular}{|r|r|l|}
+\hline \textbf{key} & \textbf{uskey} & \textbf{Source of key} \\
+\hline NULL         & NULL           & Error, not supported \\
+\hline non-NULL     & NULL           & Use key, do a key schedule \\
+\hline NULL         & non-NULL       & Use uskey, key schedule not required \\
+\hline non-NULL     & non-NULL       & Use uskey, key schedule not required \\
+\hline
+\end{tabular}
+\end{small}
+\end{center}
+
+\index{ccm\_memory()} This function is called when the user calls ccm\_memory().
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated GCM}
+\index{gcm\_memory()}
+This function is meant for accelerated GCM encryption or decryption.  It processes the entire packet in one call.  Note that the setup() function will not
+be called prior to this.  This function must handle scheduling the key provided on its own.  It is called when the user calls gcm\_memory().
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated OMAC}
+\index{omac\_memory()}
+This function is meant to perform an optimized OMAC1 (CMAC) message authentication code computation when the user calls omac\_memory().
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated XCBC-MAC}
+\index{xcbc\_memory()}
+This function is meant to perform an optimized XCBC-MAC message authentication code computation when the user calls xcbc\_memory().
+
+\subsubsection{Accelerated F9}
+\index{f9\_memory()}
+This function is meant to perform an optimized F9 message authentication code computation when the user calls f9\_memory().  Like f9\_memory(), it requires
+the caller to perform any 3GPP related padding before calling in order to ensure proper compliance with F9.
+
+
+\mysection{One--Way Hashes}
+The hash functions are accessed through the ltc\_hash\_descriptor structure.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+struct ltc_hash_descriptor {
+    /** name of hash */
+    char *name;
+
+    /** internal ID */
+    unsigned char ID;
+
+    /** Size of digest in octets */
+    unsigned long hashsize;
+
+    /** Input block size in octets */
+    unsigned long blocksize;
+
+    /** ASN.1 OID */
+    unsigned long OID[16];
+
+    /** Length of DER encoding */
+    unsigned long OIDlen;
+
+    /** Init a hash state
+      @param hash   The hash to initialize
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*init)(hash_state *hash);
+
+    /** Process a block of data
+      @param hash   The hash state
+      @param in     The data to hash
+      @param inlen  The length of the data (octets)
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*process)(         hash_state *hash,
+                   const unsigned char *in,
+                         unsigned long  inlen);
+
+    /** Produce the digest and store it
+      @param hash   The hash state
+      @param out    [out] The destination of the digest
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*done)(   hash_state *hash,
+                unsigned char *out);
+
+    /** Self-test
+      @return CRYPT_OK if successful,
+              CRYPT_NOP if self-tests have been disabled
+    */
+    int (*test)(void);
+
+    /* accelerated hmac callback: if you need to-do
+       multiple packets just use the generic hmac_memory
+       and provide a hash callback
+    */
+    int  (*hmac_block)(const unsigned char *key,
+                             unsigned long  keylen,
+                       const unsigned char *in,
+                             unsigned long  inlen,
+                             unsigned char *out,
+                             unsigned long *outlen);
+};
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\subsection{Name}
+This is the name the hash is known by and what find\_hash() will look for.
+
+\subsection{Internal ID}
+This is the internal ID byte used to distinguish the hash from other hashes.
+
+\subsection{Digest Size}
+The \textit{hashsize} variable indicates the length of the output in octets.
+
+\subsection{Block Size}
+The \textit{blocksize} variable indicates the length of input (in octets) that the hash processes in a given
+invocation.
+
+\subsection{OID Identifier}
+This is the universal ASN.1 Object Identifier for the hash.
+
+\subsection{Initialization}
+The init function initializes the hash and prepares it to process message bytes.
+
+\subsection{Process}
+This processes message bytes.  The algorithm must accept any length of input that the hash would allow.  The input is not
+guaranteed to be a multiple of the block size in length.
+
+\subsection{Done}
+The done function terminates the hash and returns the message digest.
+
+\subsection{Acceleration}
+A compatible accelerator must allow processing data in any granularity which may require internal padding on the driver side.
+
+\subsection{HMAC Acceleration}
+The hmac\_block() callback is meant for single--shot optimized HMAC implementations.  It is called directly by hmac\_memory() if present.  If you need
+to be able to process multiple blocks per MAC then you will have to simply provide a process() callback and use hmac\_memory() as provided in LibTomCrypt.
+
+\mysection{Pseudo--Random Number Generators}
+The pseudo--random number generators are accessible through the ltc\_prng\_descriptor structure.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+struct ltc_prng_descriptor {
+    /** Name of the PRNG */
+    char *name;
+
+    /** size in bytes of exported state */
+    int  export_size;
+
+    /** Start a PRNG state
+        @param prng   [out] The state to initialize
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*start)(prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Add entropy to the PRNG
+        @param in         The entropy
+        @param inlen      Length of the entropy (octets)
+        @param prng       The PRNG state
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*add_entropy)(const unsigned char *in,
+                             unsigned long  inlen,
+                                prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Ready a PRNG state to read from
+        @param prng       The PRNG state to ready
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*ready)(prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Read from the PRNG
+        @param out     [out] Where to store the data
+        @param outlen  Length of data desired (octets)
+        @param prng    The PRNG state to read from
+        @return Number of octets read
+    */
+    unsigned long (*read)(unsigned char *out,
+                          unsigned long  outlen,
+                             prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Terminate a PRNG state
+        @param prng   The PRNG state to terminate
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*done)(prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Export a PRNG state
+        @param out     [out] The destination for the state
+        @param outlen  [in/out] The max size and resulting size
+        @param prng    The PRNG to export
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*pexport)(unsigned char *out,
+                   unsigned long *outlen,
+                      prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Import a PRNG state
+        @param in      The data to import
+        @param inlen   The length of the data to import (octets)
+        @param prng    The PRNG to initialize/import
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful
+    */
+    int (*pimport)(const unsigned char *in,
+                         unsigned long  inlen,
+                            prng_state *prng);
+
+    /** Self-test the PRNG
+        @return CRYPT_OK if successful,
+                CRYPT_NOP if self-testing has been disabled
+    */
+    int (*test)(void);
+};
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+\subsection{Name}
+The name by which find\_prng() will find the PRNG.
+
+\subsection{Export Size}
+When an PRNG state is to be exported for future use you specify the space required in this variable.
+
+\subsection{Start}
+Initialize the PRNG and make it ready to accept entropy.
+
+\subsection{Entropy Addition}
+Add entropy to the PRNG state.  The exact behaviour of this function depends on the particulars of the PRNG.
+
+\subsection{Ready}
+This function makes the PRNG ready to read from by processing the entropy added.  The behaviour of this function depends
+on the specific PRNG used.
+
+\subsection{Read}
+Read from the PRNG and return the number of bytes read.  This function does not have to fill the buffer but it is best
+if it does as many protocols do not retry reads and will fail on the first try.
+
+\subsection{Done}
+Terminate a PRNG state.  The behaviour of this function depends on the particular PRNG used.
+
+\subsection{Exporting and Importing}
+An exported PRNG state is data that the PRNG can later import to resume activity.  They're not meant to resume \textit{the same session}
+but should at least maintain the same level of state entropy.
+
+\mysection{BigNum Math Descriptors}
+The library also makes use of the math descriptors to access math functions.  While bignum math libraries usually differ in implementation
+it hasn't proven hard to write \textit{glue} to use math libraries so far.  The basic descriptor looks like.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{verbatim}
+/** math descriptor */
+typedef struct {
+   /** Name of the math provider */
+   char *name;
+
+   /** Bits per digit, amount of bits must fit in an unsigned long */
+   int  bits_per_digit;
+
+/* ---- init/deinit functions ---- */
+
+   /** initialize a bignum
+     @param   a     The number to initialize
+     @return  CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*init)(void **a);
+
+   /** init copy
+     @param  dst    The number to initialize and write to
+     @param  src    The number to copy from
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*init_copy)(void **dst, void *src);
+
+   /** deinit
+      @param   a    The number to free
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   void (*deinit)(void *a);
+
+/* ---- data movement ---- */
+
+   /** negate
+      @param   src   The number to negate
+      @param   dst   The destination
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*neg)(void *src, void *dst);
+
+   /** copy
+      @param   src   The number to copy from
+      @param   dst   The number to write to
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*copy)(void *src, void *dst);
+
+/* ---- trivial low level functions ---- */
+
+   /** set small constant
+      @param a    Number to write to
+      @param n    Source upto bits_per_digit (actually meant for very small constants)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*set_int)(void *a, unsigned long n);
+
+   /** get small constant
+      @param a  Small number to read,
+                only fetches up to bits_per_digit from the number
+      @return   The lower bits_per_digit of the integer (unsigned)
+   */
+   unsigned long (*get_int)(void *a);
+
+   /** get digit n
+     @param a  The number to read from
+     @param n  The number of the digit to fetch
+     @return  The bits_per_digit  sized n'th digit of a
+   */
+   ltc_mp_digit (*get_digit)(void *a, int n);
+
+   /** Get the number of digits that represent the number
+     @param a   The number to count
+     @return The number of digits used to represent the number
+   */
+   int (*get_digit_count)(void *a);
+
+   /** compare two integers
+     @param a   The left side integer
+     @param b   The right side integer
+     @return LTC_MP_LT if a < b,
+             LTC_MP_GT if a > b and
+             LTC_MP_EQ otherwise.  (signed comparison)
+   */
+   int (*compare)(void *a, void *b);
+
+   /** compare against int
+     @param a   The left side integer
+     @param b   The right side integer (upto bits_per_digit)
+     @return LTC_MP_LT if a < b,
+             LTC_MP_GT if a > b and
+             LTC_MP_EQ otherwise.  (signed comparison)
+   */
+   int (*compare_d)(void *a, unsigned long n);
+
+   /** Count the number of bits used to represent the integer
+     @param a   The integer to count
+     @return The number of bits required to represent the integer
+   */
+   int (*count_bits)(void * a);
+
+   /** Count the number of LSB bits which are zero
+     @param a   The integer to count
+     @return The number of contiguous zero LSB bits
+   */
+   int (*count_lsb_bits)(void *a);
+
+   /** Compute a power of two
+     @param a  The integer to store the power in
+     @param n  The power of two you want to store (a = 2^n)
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*twoexpt)(void *a , int n);
+
+/* ---- radix conversions ---- */
+
+   /** read ascii string
+     @param a     The integer to store into
+     @param str   The string to read
+     @param radix The radix the integer has been represented in (2-64)
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*read_radix)(void *a, const char *str, int radix);
+
+   /** write number to string
+     @param a     The integer to store
+     @param str   The destination for the string
+     @param radix The radix the integer is to be represented in (2-64)
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*write_radix)(void *a, char *str, int radix);
+
+   /** get size as unsigned char string
+     @param a  The integer to get the size (when stored in array of octets)
+     @return   The length of the integer in octets
+   */
+   unsigned long (*unsigned_size)(void *a);
+
+   /** store an integer as an array of octets
+     @param src   The integer to store
+     @param dst   The buffer to store the integer in
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*unsigned_write)(void *src, unsigned char *dst);
+
+   /** read an array of octets and store as integer
+     @param dst   The integer to load
+     @param src   The array of octets
+     @param len   The number of octets
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*unsigned_read)(         void *dst,
+                        unsigned char *src,
+                        unsigned long  len);
+
+/* ---- basic math ---- */
+
+   /** add two integers
+     @param a   The first source integer
+     @param b   The second source integer
+     @param c   The destination of "a + b"
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*add)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** add two integers
+     @param a   The first source integer
+     @param b   The second source integer
+                (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length)
+     @param c   The destination of "a + b"
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*addi)(void *a, unsigned long b, void *c);
+
+   /** subtract two integers
+     @param a   The first source integer
+     @param b   The second source integer
+     @param c   The destination of "a - b"
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*sub)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** subtract two integers
+     @param a   The first source integer
+     @param b   The second source integer
+                (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length)
+     @param c   The destination of "a - b"
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*subi)(void *a, unsigned long b, void *c);
+
+   /** multiply two integers
+     @param a   The first source integer
+     @param b   The second source integer
+                (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length)
+     @param c   The destination of "a * b"
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*mul)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** multiply two integers
+     @param a   The first source integer
+     @param b   The second source integer
+                (single digit of upto bits_per_digit in length)
+     @param c   The destination of "a * b"
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*muli)(void *a, unsigned long b, void *c);
+
+   /** Square an integer
+     @param a    The integer to square
+     @param b    The destination
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*sqr)(void *a, void *b);
+
+   /** Divide an integer
+     @param a    The dividend
+     @param b    The divisor
+     @param c    The quotient (can be NULL to signify don't care)
+     @param d    The remainder (can be NULL to signify don't care)
+     @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*mpdiv)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d);
+
+   /** divide by two
+      @param  a   The integer to divide (shift right)
+      @param  b   The destination
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*div_2)(void *a, void *b);
+
+   /** Get remainder (small value)
+      @param  a    The integer to reduce
+      @param  b    The modulus (upto bits_per_digit in length)
+      @param  c    The destination for the residue
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*modi)(void *a, unsigned long b, unsigned long *c);
+
+   /** gcd
+      @param  a     The first integer
+      @param  b     The second integer
+      @param  c     The destination for (a, b)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*gcd)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** lcm
+      @param  a     The first integer
+      @param  b     The second integer
+      @param  c     The destination for [a, b]
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*lcm)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** Modular multiplication
+      @param  a     The first source
+      @param  b     The second source
+      @param  c     The modulus
+      @param  d     The destination (a*b mod c)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*mulmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d);
+
+   /** Modular squaring
+      @param  a     The first source
+      @param  b     The modulus
+      @param  c     The destination (a*a mod b)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*sqrmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** Modular inversion
+      @param  a     The value to invert
+      @param  b     The modulus
+      @param  c     The destination (1/a mod b)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*invmod)(void *, void *, void *);
+
+/* ---- reduction ---- */
+
+   /** setup Montgomery
+       @param a  The modulus
+       @param b  The destination for the reduction digit
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*montgomery_setup)(void *a, void **b);
+
+   /** get normalization value
+       @param a   The destination for the normalization value
+       @param b   The modulus
+       @return  CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*montgomery_normalization)(void *a, void *b);
+
+   /** reduce a number
+       @param a   The number [and dest] to reduce
+       @param b   The modulus
+       @param c   The value "b" from montgomery_setup()
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*montgomery_reduce)(void *a, void *b, void *c);
+
+   /** clean up  (frees memory)
+       @param a   The value "b" from montgomery_setup()
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   void (*montgomery_deinit)(void *a);
+
+/* ---- exponentiation ---- */
+
+   /** Modular exponentiation
+       @param a    The base integer
+       @param b    The power (can be negative) integer
+       @param c    The modulus integer
+       @param d    The destination
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*exptmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d);
+
+   /** Primality testing
+       @param a     The integer to test
+       @param b     The number of Miller-Rabin tests that shall be executed
+       @param c     The destination of the result (FP_YES if prime)
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*isprime)(void *a, int b, int *c);
+
+/* ----  (optional) ecc point math ---- */
+
+   /** ECC GF(p) point multiplication (from the NIST curves)
+       @param k   The integer to multiply the point by
+       @param G   The point to multiply
+       @param R   The destination for kG
+       @param modulus  The modulus for the field
+       @param map Boolean indicated whether to map back to affine or not
+                  (can be ignored if you work in affine only)
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*ecc_ptmul)(     void *k,
+                    ecc_point *G,
+                    ecc_point *R,
+                         void *modulus,
+                          int  map);
+
+   /** ECC GF(p) point addition
+       @param P    The first point
+       @param Q    The second point
+       @param R    The destination of P + Q
+       @param modulus  The modulus
+       @param mp   The "b" value from montgomery_setup()
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*ecc_ptadd)(ecc_point *P,
+                    ecc_point *Q,
+                    ecc_point *R,
+                         void *modulus,
+                         void *mp);
+
+   /** ECC GF(p) point double
+       @param P    The first point
+       @param R    The destination of 2P
+       @param modulus  The modulus
+       @param mp   The "b" value from montgomery_setup()
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*ecc_ptdbl)(ecc_point *P,
+                    ecc_point *R,
+                         void *modulus,
+                         void *mp);
+
+   /** ECC mapping from projective to affine,
+       currently uses (x,y,z) => (x/z^2, y/z^3, 1)
+       @param P     The point to map
+       @param modulus The modulus
+       @param mp    The "b" value from montgomery_setup()
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+       @remark The mapping can be different but keep in mind a
+               ecc_point only has three integers (x,y,z) so if
+               you use a different mapping you have to make it fit.
+   */
+   int (*ecc_map)(ecc_point *P, void *modulus, void *mp);
+
+   /** Computes kA*A + kB*B = C using Shamir's Trick
+       @param A        First point to multiply
+       @param kA       What to multiple A by
+       @param B        Second point to multiply
+       @param kB       What to multiple B by
+       @param C        [out] Destination point (can overlap with A or B)
+       @param modulus  Modulus for curve
+       @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*ecc_mul2add)(ecc_point *A, void *kA,
+                      ecc_point *B, void *kB,
+                      ecc_point *C,
+                           void *modulus);
+
+/* ---- (optional) rsa optimized math (for internal CRT) ---- */
+
+   /** RSA Key Generation
+       @param prng     An active PRNG state
+       @param wprng    The index of the PRNG desired
+       @param size     The size of the key in octets
+       @param e        The "e" value (public key).
+                       e==65537 is a good choice
+       @param key      [out] Destination of a newly created private key pair
+       @return CRYPT_OK if successful, upon error all allocated ram is freed
+    */
+    int (*rsa_keygen)(prng_state *prng,
+                             int  wprng,
+                             int  size,
+                            long  e,
+                         rsa_key *key);
+
+   /** RSA exponentiation
+      @param in       The octet array representing the base
+      @param inlen    The length of the input
+      @param out      The destination (to be stored in an octet array format)
+      @param outlen   The length of the output buffer and the resulting size
+                      (zero padded to the size of the modulus)
+      @param which    PK_PUBLIC for public RSA and PK_PRIVATE for private RSA
+      @param key      The RSA key to use
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*rsa_me)(const unsigned char *in,   unsigned long inlen,
+                       unsigned char *out,  unsigned long *outlen, int which,
+                       rsa_key *key);
+
+/* ---- basic math continued ---- */
+
+   /** Modular addition
+      @param  a     The first source
+      @param  b     The second source
+      @param  c     The modulus
+      @param  d     The destination (a + b mod c)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*addmod)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d);
+
+   /** Modular substraction
+      @param  a     The first source
+      @param  b     The second source
+      @param  c     The modulus
+      @param  d     The destination (a - b mod c)
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*submod)(void *a, void *b, void *c, void *d);
+
+/* ---- misc stuff ---- */
+
+   /** Make a pseudo-random mpi
+      @param  a     The mpi to make random
+      @param  size  The desired length
+      @return CRYPT_OK on success
+   */
+   int (*rand)(void *a, int size);
+} ltc_math_descriptor;
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{small}
+
+Most of the functions are fairly straightforward and do not need documentation.  We'll cover the basic conventions of the API and then explain the accelerated functions.
+
+\subsection{Conventions}
+
+All \textit{bignums} are accessed through an opaque \textit{void *} data type.  You must internally cast the pointer if you need to access members of your bignum structure.  During
+the init calls a \textit{void **} will be passed where you allocate your structure and set the pointer then initialize the number to zero.  During the deinit calls you must
+free the bignum as well as the structure you allocated to place it in.
+
+All functions except the Montgomery reductions work from left to right with the arguments.  For example, mul(a, b, c) computes $c \leftarrow ab$.
+
+All functions (except where noted otherwise) return \textbf{CRYPT\_OK} to signify a successful operation.  All error codes must be valid LibTomCrypt error codes.
+
+The digit routines (including functions with the \textit{i} suffix) use a \textit{ltc\_mp\_digit} to represent the digit.  If your internal digit is larger than this you must
+then partition your digits.  Note that if your digit is smaller than an \textit{ltc\_mp\_digit} that is also acceptable as the \textit{bits\_per\_digit} parameter will specify this.
+
+\subsubsection{ltc\_mp\_digit}
+\index{ltc\_mp\_digit}
+
+Depending on the archtitecture \textit{ltc\_mp\_digit} is either a $32$- or $64$-bit long \textit{unsigned} data type.
+
+\subsection{ECC Functions}
+The ECC system in LibTomCrypt is based off of the NIST recommended curves over $GF(p)$ and is used to implement EC-DSA and EC-DH.   The ECC functions work with
+the \textbf{ecc\_point} structure and assume the points are stored in Jacobian projective format.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+/** A point on a ECC curve, stored in Jacobian format such
+    that (x,y,z) => (x/z^2, y/z^3, 1) when interpreted as affine */
+typedef struct {
+    /** The x co-ordinate */
+    void *x;
+    /** The y co-ordinate */
+    void *y;
+    /** The z co-ordinate */
+    void *z;
+} ecc_point;
+\end{verbatim}
+
+All ECC functions must use this mapping system.  The only exception is when you remap all ECC callbacks which will allow you to have more control
+over how the ECC math will be implemented.  Out of the box you only have three parameters per point to use $(x, y, z)$ however, these are just void pointers.  They
+could point to anything you want.  The only further exception is the export functions which expects the values to be in affine format.
+
+\subsubsection{Point Multiply}
+This will multiply the point $G$ by the scalar $k$ and store the result in the point $R$.  The value should be mapped to affine only if $map$ is set to one.
+
+\subsubsection{Point Addition}
+This will add the point $P$ to the point $Q$ and store it in the point $R$.  The $mp$ parameter is the \textit{b} value from the montgomery\_setup() call.  The input points
+may be in either affine (with $z = 1$) or projective format and the output point is always projective.
+
+\subsubsection{Point Mapping}
+This will map the point $P$ back from projective to affine.  The output point $P$ must be of the form $(x, y, 1)$.
+
+\subsubsection{Shamir's Trick}
+\index{Shamir's Trick}
+\index{ltc\_ecc\_mul2add()}
+To accelerate EC--DSA verification the library provides a built--in function called ltc\_ecc\_mul2add().  This performs two point multiplications and an addition in
+roughly the time of one point multiplication.  It is called from ecc\_verify\_hash() if an accelerator is not present.  The acclerator function must allow the points to
+overlap (e.g., $A \leftarrow k_1A + k_2B$) and must return the final point in affine format.
+
+
+\subsection{RSA Functions}
+The RSA Modular Exponentiation (ME) function is used by the RSA API to perform exponentiations for private and public key operations.  In particular for
+private key operations it uses the CRT approach to lower the time required.  It is passed an RSA key with the following format.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+/** RSA PKCS style key */
+typedef struct Rsa_key {
+    /** Type of key, PK_PRIVATE or PK_PUBLIC */
+    int type;
+    /** The public exponent */
+    void *e;
+    /** The private exponent */
+    void *d;
+    /** The modulus */
+    void *N;
+    /** The p factor of N */
+    void *p;
+    /** The q factor of N */
+    void *q;
+    /** The 1/q mod p CRT param */
+    void *qP;
+    /** The d mod (p - 1) CRT param */
+    void *dP;
+    /** The d mod (q - 1) CRT param */
+    void *dQ;
+} rsa_key;
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The call reads the \textit{in} buffer as an unsigned char array in big endian format.  Then it performs the exponentiation and stores the output in big endian format
+to the \textit{out} buffer.  The output must be zero padded (leading bytes) so that the length of the output matches the length of the modulus (in bytes).  For example,
+for RSA--1024 the output is always 128 bytes regardless of how small the numerical value of the exponentiation is.
+
+Since the function is given the entire RSA key (for private keys only) CRT is possible as prescribed in the PKCS \#1 v2.1 specification.
+
+\newpage
+\markboth{Index}{Index}
+\input{crypt.ind}
+
+\end{document}
+
+% ref:         $Format:%D$
+% git commit:  $Format:%H$
+% commit time: $Format:%ai$
diff --git a/libtomcrypt/doc/libtomsm.png b/libtomcrypt/doc/libtomsm.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c009a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtomcrypt/doc/libtomsm.png
diff --git a/libtomcrypt/doc/makefile b/libtomcrypt/doc/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9b75e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libtomcrypt/doc/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+ifeq ($V,1)
+silent=
+silent_stdout=
+else
+silent=@
+silent_stdout= > /dev/null
+endif
+
+#Files left over from making the crypt.pdf.
+LEFTOVERS=*.dvi *.log *.aux *.toc *.idx *.ilg *.ind *.out *.lof
+
+#build the doxy files (requires Doxygen, tetex and patience)
+.PHONY: doxygen
+doxygen:
+	doxygen $(silent_stdout)
+
+patched_doxygen:
+	(cat Doxyfile && echo "HAVE_DOT=no") | doxygen - $(silent_stdout)
+
+doxy: patched_doxygen
+	${MAKE} -C doxygen/latex $(silent_stdout) && mv -f doxygen/latex/refman.pdf .
+	@echo The huge doxygen PDF should be available as doc/refman.pdf
+
+#This builds the crypt.pdf file. Note that the rm -f *.pdf has been removed
+#from the clean command! This is because most people would like to keep the
+#nice pre-compiled crypt.pdf that comes with libtomcrypt! We only need to
+#delete it if we are rebuilding it.
+docs crypt.pdf: crypt.tex
+	rm -f crypt.pdf $(LEFTOVERS)
+	cp crypt.tex crypt.bak
+	touch -r crypt.tex crypt.bak
+	(printf "%s" "\def\fixedpdfdate{"; date +'D:%Y%m%d%H%M%S%:z' -d @$$(stat --format=%Y crypt.tex) | sed "s/:\([0-9][0-9]\)$$/'\1'}/g") > crypt-deterministic.tex
+	printf "%s\n" "\pdfinfo{" >> crypt-deterministic.tex
+	printf "%s\n" "  /CreationDate (\fixedpdfdate)" >> crypt-deterministic.tex
+	printf "%s\n}\n" "  /ModDate (\fixedpdfdate)" >> crypt-deterministic.tex
+	cat crypt.tex >> crypt-deterministic.tex
+	mv crypt-deterministic.tex crypt.tex
+	touch -r crypt.bak crypt.tex
+	echo "hello" > crypt.ind
+	latex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+	latex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+	makeindex crypt.idx $(silent_stdout)
+	perl ../helper.pl --fixupind crypt.ind
+	pdflatex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+	sed -b -i 's,^/ID \[.*\]$$,/ID [<0> <0>],g' crypt.pdf
+	mv crypt.bak crypt.tex
+	rm -f $(LEFTOVERS)
+
+docdvi: crypt.tex
+	echo hello > crypt.ind
+	latex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+	latex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+	makeindex crypt.idx
+	perl ../helper.pl --fixupind crypt.ind
+	latex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+	latex crypt $(silent_stdout)
+
+termdoc: docdvi
+	dvi2tty crypt.dvi -w120
+
+clean:
+	rm -f $(LEFTOVERS)
+	rm -rf doxygen/